JP2012223204A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent a fraud by surely detecting and notifying the fraud perpetrated when a door body is in an open state.SOLUTION: This game machine includes a door opening sensor for detecting the state (an open state or a closed state) of a glass door frame, and respective winning switches (a count switch, a first operation-start hole switch, a second operation-start hole switch, and a winning hole switch) for detecting a game ball in each winning hole. This game machine determines that an abnormal win is produced based on the fact that one of the winning switches detects a game ball in a winning hole when the door opening sensor detects that the glass door frame is in an open state, and, performs control to output special sound for notifying the abnormal win based on the determination of the occurrence of the abnormal win.

Description

  The present invention provides a pachinko that includes a door body that can be changed between a closed state that covers a game area and an open state that allows the game area to be contacted from the outside, and is capable of performing a predetermined game using a game medium. It relates to gaming machines such as machines, slot machines, and parrot machines.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game media are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Also, when a game medium is inserted, a predetermined number of bets are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated by operating the operation lever, and a combination of stop symbols is specified when the symbols are stopped by operating the stop button There are cases where a predetermined number of premium game media are paid out to the player. Also, when a predetermined number of bets are set according to the number of game media taken in, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated by operating the operation lever, and the symbols are stopped when the symbols are stopped by operating the stop button. When the combination becomes a combination of specific symbols, a predetermined number of game media may be paid out to the player.

  Game progress in the gaming machine is controlled by game control means such as a microcomputer. If the payout control means for controlling the payout of game media is mounted on a payout control board different from the game control board (main board) on which the game control means is mounted, the progress of the game is mounted on the main board Therefore, the number of prize game media based on the winning is determined by the game control means, and a control command indicating the number of prize game media is transmitted to the payout control board. Then, the payout control means performs a process of paying out the prize game medium based on the winning based on the control command from the game control means.

  Moreover, in such a gaming machine, there is one configured to be able to monitor whether or not a glass door provided in the gaming machine is in an open state in order to prevent fraud (for example, Patent Document 1). reference). For example, in Patent Document 1, a door switch that can detect the open state of a glass door with respect to a game frame is provided. When the glass door is opened and the door switch is turned on, a TV camera provided in the game hall is driven. In addition, it is described that the gaming machine with the glass door opened is projected in the management room, and that a warning sound is emitted from the management device in the management room or connected to a video tape.

JP-A-2-280786 (second page, lower right column, lines 9-13, page 3, lower right column, lines 4-14)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since it can be notified that the glass door has been opened and an alarm sound is generated, an effect of preventing fraudulent acts performed by opening the glass door is expected to some extent. it can. However, it is only possible to detect the state in which the glass door is in an open state, and in the state in which the glass door is in an open state, an illegal act is actually performed (for example, illegally entering the start prize opening with the glass door in the open state). It is not possible to detect whether or not an act of aiming for a big hit by generating a start prize is performed. For this reason, it is not always possible to reliably detect and notify that fraud has been performed, and it is not necessarily possible to prevent fraud.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent fraud by reliably detecting and notifying fraud.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can be changed between a closed state that covers a game area (specifically, a game board 6 on which the game area 7 is formed) and an open state that makes the game area accessible from the outside. A door state detection unit that includes a door (for example, a glass door frame 2) and is capable of performing a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and detects a state of the door (For example, a door opening sensor 155) and a game medium detecting means for detecting a game medium passing through a specific area (for example, a big winning opening, a starting winning opening 14, and a normal winning opening 29, 30) provided in the gaming area ( For example, when it is detected that the door body is in the open state by the count switch 23, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the winning port switches 29a, 30a) and the door state detecting means, Game media inspection Based on the fact that the game medium has been detected by the means, an abnormal passage determination means for determining that an abnormal passage (for example, abnormal winning) has occurred (for example, a portion for executing steps S1131 to S1136 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). And an abnormal passage notification means for outputting a predetermined notification sound for notifying abnormal passage based on the fact that the abnormal passage has been determined to have occurred by the abnormal passage determination means (for example, step in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) A portion for executing S692 and S693).
According to such a configuration, when the door body is in an open state, it is possible to notify the abnormal passage by outputting a predetermined notification sound based on the fact that the game medium is detected in the predetermined passage area. Therefore, an unauthorized act can be prevented by reliably detecting and notifying an unauthorized act performed when the door is in an open state.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the rear view which looked at the gaming machine from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the cross-sectional structure in a start winning opening. It is a circuit diagram for demonstrating the system of the detection means which can detect a game ball. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in a game control means. It is a circuit diagram which shows the internal structure of a terminal board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of a hot start process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of effect design. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to the payout control means from a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control means and a payout control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the error information set to a connection OK command and a prize ball preparation command. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball command output counter addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball command output counter addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball transmission processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball connection confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball transmission process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball receipt confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball completion | finish confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball counter subtraction process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a frame state output process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of EXT data set to a frame state display command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each 2 byte buffer formed in RAM used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch normal / abnormality check process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize abnormality check process at the time of door opening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switch normal / abnormality check process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switch normal / abnormality check process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the case where a game ball raise | generates the ball clogged state in the start winning opening. It is a block diagram which shows the various signals output to a terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning timer set process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the output timing of a highly accurate middle signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the output timing of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in a payout control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the input port in a payout control means. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control connection confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows main control communication normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows main control communication normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during main control communication. It is a flowchart which shows the process during main control communication. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication end process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control transmission command conversion process. It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the payout start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor stop waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of 1 structure of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a prize ball command output counter addition process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the physical structure of a terminal board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the physical structure of a terminal board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the cross-section of the site | part to which the terminal board | substrate of a cover member is attached. FIG. 11 is a front view of a slot machine as a modification of the gaming machine according to the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural examples, such as a game control board (main board) and an effect control board, in a slot machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the fourth special symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol is kept lit in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. . When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the fourth special symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is kept lit in a display color reminiscent of the big hit (for example, red).

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be able to open and close the wings, and when the wings are open, the game ball is likely to win a prize (open state), and when the wings are not open (closed). The game ball becomes difficult to win (closed state). The game ball won in the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by a second start opening switch 14a (for example, a proximity switch), and a winning confirmation switch 14b. (For example, a photo sensor). In this embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the second start port switch 14a, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a prize ball payout is executed. Further, as will be described later, the presence or absence of occurrence of an abnormal winning is determined based on the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b in addition to the detection result of the second start opening switch 14a, and the occurrence of the abnormal winning is detected. A security signal is output externally. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16.

  For each of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, a start opening switch (for example, a proximity switch) may be provided and a winning confirmation switch (for example, a photo sensor) may be provided. Then, for each of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variation display of the special symbol is started based on the detection of the game ball by the start opening switch as in this embodiment. A ball payout may be executed. Further, for each of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred is determined based on the detection result of the winning confirmation switch in addition to the detection result by the start opening switch, as in this embodiment. A security signal may be output to the outside based on the determination and the occurrence of an abnormal winning.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14 (easier to start winning), and is in an advantageous state for the player. Become. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In this embodiment, only the second start winning opening 14 is provided with a winning confirmation switch 14b in addition to the second start opening switch 14a. However, in addition to the count switch 23, the big winning opening is also provided. A winning confirmation switch may be provided. In this case, for example, the count switch 13 may be configured by using a proximity switch and the winning confirmation switch may be configured by using a photosensor as in the case of the second start winning opening 14 (inversely, counting The switch 13 may be configured using a photo sensor, and the winning confirmation switch may be configured using a proximity switch, or a mechanical switch such as a micro switch may be used instead of the proximity switch or the photo sensor). Further, the game control microcomputer may perform the payout of the winning ball based only on the detection result of the count switch 23 in the winning ball payout process based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening (step). (See S32). On the other hand, the game control microcomputer, when performing an abnormal winning to the big winning opening, may make a determination based on both the detection result of the count switch 23 and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch. . In this case, for example, in the game control microcomputer, the difference between the detected number of the count switch 23 and the detected number of the winning confirmation switch is a predetermined value (for example, 10) according to the same process as the switch normal / abnormal check process described later. Based on what has been described above, it may be determined that an abnormal winning in the special winning opening has occurred (see steps S121 to S127).

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29 and 30 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of game balls. The game balls that have won the winning ports 29 and 30 are detected by the winning port switches 29a and 30a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine as seen from the back side. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are a variable display control unit including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer 100 for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, and the like. Various boards such as a mounted game control board (main board) 31, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 mounted with a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control are installed. Yes. The game control board 31 is stored in the board storage case 200.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91 on which power supply circuits for generating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are mounted. The power supply board 910 is supplied with the game control board 31 and each electrical component control board (the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and each electrical component (power is supplied) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A power switch as a power supply permission means for executing or shutting off the power supply to the component), and a clear switch for clearing the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 of the game control board 31 are provided. ing. Further, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch (inside the substrate).

  In this embodiment, the main board 31 is provided on the game board side, and the payout control board 37 is provided on the game frame side. Even in such a configuration, as will be described later, the communication between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is performed by serial communication, thereby facilitating the routing of the wiring when replacing the game board. .

  Each control board is equipped with control means including a control microcomputer. The control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, effect display device 9, light emission from a lamp, LED, etc.) provided in the gaming machine according to a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. Body, speaker 27, etc.). Hereinafter, the main board 31 may be included in the control board for explanation. In that case, the control means mounted on the control board refers to each of the game control means and the means for controlling the electrical components provided in the gaming machine in accordance with a command signal from the game control means or the like. A substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub-substrate. The ball payout device 97 is a device for paying out a game ball guided by a passage for guiding the game ball and a sprocket driven by a stepping motor or the like to an upper plate or a lower plate. A payout number counting switch for counting prize balls and rental balls is also configured as part of the unit. In this embodiment, the payout detection means is realized by the payout number count switch 301 and has a function of detecting that a winning ball or a lending ball is actually paid out from the ball payout device 97. In this case, the payout number count switch 301 outputs a detection signal every time one payout of prize balls or rental balls is detected.

  On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 160 having terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. The terminal board 160 has, for example, an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state (symbol determination number of times 1 signal shown in FIG. 53, start port signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, hour An information output terminal for externally outputting a short signal, a winning signal, a security signal, a high-accuracy signal, and winning ball information) is provided.

  The game ball stored in the storage tank 38 passes through a guide rail (not shown), and reaches a ball payout device 97 covered with a payout case 40A through a curve rod. Above the ball payout device 97, a ball break switch 187 is provided as a game medium break detection means. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the payout operation of the ball payout device 97 stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch 167 for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the guide rail (in the storage tank 38). (Proximate part). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects a shortage of game balls, the game balls are replenished to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning a prize or a game ball based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball guiding path. Further, when the game ball is paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses the full tank switch as the storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as the storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, above the front frame, a door body (in this example, a glass door frame 2) is in a closed state (covering the game area 7 or in a state in which the game area 7 can be contacted from the outside). (Specifically, detecting whether or not the glass door frame 2 is opened with respect to the front frame to which the game board 6 having the game area 7 formed on the front surface is attached). A door opening sensor 155 is attached.

  FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a cross-sectional structure in the second start winning opening 14. As shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 14 is provided with two switches (a second start opening switch 14a and a winning confirmation switch 14b) capable of detecting a game ball won in the start winning opening. . In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a second start opening switch 14a and a winning confirmation switch 14b are arranged vertically in the second start winning opening 14 (in this example, the second start opening). The switch 14a is disposed on the upper side, and the winning confirmation switch 14b is disposed on the lower side). Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball won in the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6, first detected by the second start opening switch 14a, and then detected by the winning confirmation switch 14b. The

  Further, as the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b, switches of different detection methods are used. In this embodiment, a case where a proximity switch is used as the second start port switch 14a and a photosensor is used as the winning confirmation switch 14b is shown.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, on the basis of the fact that a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a special symbol variation display is started and a prize ball payout is executed. Further, as will be described later, the presence or absence of occurrence of an abnormal winning is determined based on the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b in addition to the detection result of the second start opening switch 14a, and the occurrence of the abnormal winning is detected. A security signal is output externally. Therefore, in this embodiment, the winning confirmation switch 14b is used only for determining an abnormal winning. Even if the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, the special symbol variation display is started, but it may be configured not to give out a prize. In this case, the starting port is not a winning area with prize payout but an entry area where a game ball enters (no prize payout even if it passes through it). Also, the winning area and the entering area are defined as a specific area or a passing area.

  Further, the detection method of the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the detection method may be different between the second starting port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b. For example, a photo sensor may be used as the second start port switch 14a, and a proximity switch may be used as the winning confirmation switch 14b. In this case, the special symbol change display and the winning ball payout process are executed based on the detection result of the second start port switch 14a which is a photosensor, and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b which is a proximity switch is the second start winning prize. It is used only for the determination of the abnormal winning of the mouth 14. Further, for example, a mechanical switch (such as a micro switch) may be used as the second start port switch 14a or the winning confirmation switch 14b instead of the proximity switch or the optical photosensor that is an electromagnetic switch.

  FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram for explaining a method of detection means capable of detecting a game ball. FIG. 4A shows the second start port switch 14a (proximity switch). The + 12V power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 910 to one terminal of the second start port switch 14a. A detection signal that is the voltage level of the other terminal of the second start port switch 14 a is input to the main board 31. In the main board 31, the detection signal is input from the input driver circuit to the input port of the game control microcomputer. A resistor R and a capacitor C, one end of which is grounded, are connected to the output side of the second start port switch 14a.

  When a metal game ball passes through a hole provided in the second start port switch 14a that is a proximity switch, a counter electromotive force is generated in the coil L, and the equivalent resistance value of the coil L becomes extremely large. Therefore, the output of the second start port switch 14a becomes a low level close to 0V. That is, the detection signal is at a low level. When the metal game ball does not pass through the hole provided in the second start port switch 14a, the output of the second start port switch 14a is divided by + 12V by the resistance value of the coil L and the resistance R. Exceeding a threshold level that is considered high. That is, the detection signal is at a high level. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer can determine that the second start port switch 14a is in the OFF state if the output from the second start port switch 14a is at a high level. If the output from the start port switch 14a is at a low level, it can be determined that the second start port switch 14a is in an ON state (that is, the output of the second start port switch 14a has a negative logic). The detection signal level may be logically inverted by the input driver circuit and then input to the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 4B shows a winning confirmation switch 14b (photo sensor). The photosensor illustrated in FIG. 4B includes a light-emitting diode (LED) 341 that emits light and a phototransistor 342 that receives light and outputs current. When the game ball passes in the vicinity of the light-emitting diode 341 and the phototransistor 342, the phototransistor 342 receives light from the light-emitting diode 341 reflected by the game ball and causes a current to flow to the output side. In this case, since a current flows from the collector terminal of the phototransistor 342 toward the emitter terminal, the detection signal of the photosensor is negative logic as in the proximity switch. The output side of the photosensor is connected to the main board 31, and the detection signal of the photosensor is input from the input driver circuit to the input port of the game control microcomputer. When a current flows to the output side of the photosensor (specifically, the output side of the phototransistor 342), the input driver circuit outputs a high level detection signal to the game control microcomputer. As with the proximity switch, the level of the detection signal may be logically inverted by an input driver circuit and then input to the game control microcomputer 560.

  The game control microcomputer can determine that the game ball has passed through the photosensor when the detection signal from the input driver circuit is at a low level.

  In this embodiment, a reflective photosensor is used as a photosensor. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 4C, a light emitting element (LED 341) and a light receiving element (phototransistor 342) are used as winning balls. The game balls that have been installed so as to face each other and the game ball blocks light from the light emitting element and the light receiving element does not detect the light, thereby detecting the game ball that has passed between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. A transmissive photosensor may be used. When a transmissive photosensor is used, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 4C, the optical axis of the light emitting element (illustrated by a black circle in FIG. 4C) is a game ball path (winning ball). It is preferable to install the light emitting element and the light receiving element so as to deviate from the center of the game ball passing through the route. Compared to the case where the optical axis corresponds to the central portion of the game ball, a portion where the interval between two game balls passing through is relatively wide (the portion of “void” in FIG. 4C) This is because the game ball can be detected at, and the two game balls can be easily detected separately. For the same reason, when using the reflective photosensor illustrated in FIG. 4B, the light emitting element and the light receiving element are installed so that the reflection point of the light from the light emitting element is shifted from the center of the game ball. It is preferable to do.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 5 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The game control microcomputer 560 includes a random number circuit 503. The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and the production symbol. Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a big hit display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a big hit. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 has a built-in serial communication circuit 505 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals to / from the payout control board 37 (the payout control microcomputer 370) by serial communication. The payout control microcomputer 370 also includes a serial communication circuit for inputting / outputting signals via the serial communication with the game control microcomputer 560 (a serial communication circuit built in the payout control microcomputer 370). (See FIG. 6).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (a special symbol process flag, a value of a reserved memory number counter for counting the number of reserved memories) and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls ( Specifically, a value of a prize ball command output counter (to be described later) is stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for resuming the game based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). Instead of mounting the power monitoring circuit on the power supply board, it may be mounted on a board that is backed up by a backup power supply (for example, the main board 31). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying the basic circuit 53 with detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the winning confirmation switch 14b, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a and 30a. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening / closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball apparatus according to a command from the basic circuit 53 is also mounted on the main board 31. A system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on, and an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state are sent to the hall via the terminal board 160. An information output circuit 64 for outputting to an external device such as a computer is also mainly used. It is mounted to the plate 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the effect display device 9 that receives and displays the effect symbol variably is performed.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 37 and the ball payout device 97. As shown in FIG. 6, a payout control microcomputer 370 including a payout control CPU 371 is mounted on the payout control board 37. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control means. That is, the payout control means is realized by a payout control CPU 371, a payout control microcomputer 370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 370. Note that, unlike the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM built in the payout control microcomputer 370 has not been backed up by a backup power source. Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the stored contents of the RAM built in the payout control microcomputer 370 are lost.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 performs control to pay out the game ball based on the fact that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The predetermined payout condition is that a game ball has won in a winning area (ordinary winning holes 29, 30, large winning opening, first starting winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14) provided in the game area. It is established when a rental ball request is made. In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot machine or a slot machine, the predetermined payout condition is also satisfied when a game ball or medal return request is made. Further, for example, when applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot machine or a slot machine, the predetermined payout condition is also established when the symbol stop symbol becomes a predetermined winning symbol.

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 187, the full switch 48, and the payout count switch 301 are input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and then output to the main board 31 via the I / O port 372a and the output circuit 373B. .

  Detection signals from the door opening sensor 155 and the dispensing motor position sensor 295 are input to the I / O port 372 e of the dispensing control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout motor position sensor 295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. . In the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, the detection signal from the ball break switch 187 indicates that the ball is out of ball, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates that the ball is full. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 90 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. A full tank signal is output. A launch motor signal output from the AND circuit 91 of the launch board 90 to the launch motor 94 is transmitted from the launch board 90 to the launch motor 94. A full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 91 mounted on the launch board 90, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 92 (for driving the launch motor 94). Is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 91. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 91 is input to the firing motor 94. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 94 is stopped. Even when the payout control microcomputer 370 is outputting a full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 94 is not stopped, and the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher is not stopped. May be.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 560 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 via serial communication circuits 505 and 380. In order to confirm, payout control commands (connection confirmation command, connection OK command) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a connection confirmation command for performing connection confirmation at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 505, and the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the game control microcomputer 560 from the game control microcomputer 560. When the connection confirmation command is received, a connection OK command notifying that is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. Also, for example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 560 sets data indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the number of winning balls set in the setting. The command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball number reception command indicating that the prize ball number has been received to the game control microcomputer 560. Further, when the payout control microcomputer 370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it transmits a prize ball end command indicating the completion of the prize ball to the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 at regular intervals until the prize ball payout operation is completed. In addition, when a predetermined error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, or out of ball) has occurred, the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command or the winning ball preparation command should be made different from the data indicating the error content. The connection OK command and the winning ball preparation command in which the setting is made are transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 372c. A detection signal from an error release switch 375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 372f of the payout control board 37. The error cancel switch 375 is used to cancel the error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout motor 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 97 via the output port 372a and the relay board 72. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 372a, the description is omitted in FIG.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 50 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 50 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 60, a ball lending LED 61, a ball lending switch 62, and a return switch 63 provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 66.

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are provided to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. An interface board 66 is interposed between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 50. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 50 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 50, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 37. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 37.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 50 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 50, drives the payout motor 289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 50 to fall. Thereafter, when a BRDY signal from the card unit 50 is not in an ON state, a prize ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control means.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 50 is supplied from the payout control board 37. That is, power supply from the power supply board 910 to the card unit 50 is performed via the payout control board 37 and the interface board 66. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 50 is provided in a 24 V AC power supply line for the card unit 50 arranged in the interface board 66, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 50. It is prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the card unit 50 is installed adjacent to the gaming machine as a separate body from the gaming machine is taken as an example, but the card unit 50 may be integrated with the gaming machine. . Further, the present invention can be applied even in the case where game balls corresponding to the amount of money are lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 7, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 8, a payout control signal (a connection signal in this example) transmitted to the payout control board 37 is output from the output port 0. Further, a solenoid (large winning port door solenoid) 21 for opening and closing a variable winning ball device 20 for opening and closing the big winning port, and a solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 are driven. The signal is also output from output port 0. In addition, a high-accuracy medium signal among signals output from the output port 0 to an external device (for example, a hall computer) via the terminal board 160 is also output.

  Note that the logic (for example, 0 is on) opposite to the “logic” (for example, 1 is on) shown in FIG. 8 may be used. In particular, for the connection signal, the main board 31 and the payout control board. The “logic” is determined so that the payout control microcomputer 370 always detects the off state when the signal line to the terminal 37 is disconnected or when the cable is disconnected (including no cable connection). . Specifically, generally, when disconnection or cable disconnection occurs, a high level is detected on the signal receiving side, so the high level on the signal line between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is the game control means. The “logic” is determined to be in the off state at the output port at. Therefore, if necessary, an output buffer circuit for logically inverting the signal is provided outside the output port on the main board 31.

  From the output port 1 to the external device (for example, hall computer) via the terminal board 160, various information output signals, that is, information related to the control (for example, symbol determination frequency 1 signal, start port signal, jackpot 1 signal, 2 jackpots, 3 jackpots, time-short signal, winning signal, security signal) are output. However, as already described, the high-accuracy intermediate signal among the signals output externally is output from the output port 0. In this embodiment, prize ball information (a signal outputted every time ten prize ball payouts are detected) is also outputted to an external device via the terminal board 160. In this case, on the payout control board 37 side, a prize ball payout is detected, and prize ball information is input to the main board 31. The prize ball information input to the main board 31 is output to the outside via the terminal board 160 via the main board 31 as it is without passing through the game control microcomputer 560. The prize ball information input to the main board 31 may be output to the outside via the terminal board 160 after temporarily passing through the game control microcomputer 560.

  Note that signals output to the outside via the terminal board 160 are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, a door opening signal indicating that the gaming frame is in an open state, a prize ball signal 1 (a signal output every time one prize ball payout is detected), a gaming machine error status signal (a gaming machine has an error) The state (in this example, a signal indicating that the ball is out of error state or full tank error state) may also be output to the external device via the terminal board 160. In this case, on the payout control board 37 side, it is also detected that the gaming frame is in an open state, a prize ball payout, and an error state of the gaming machine, and the door opening signal, the prize ball signal 1, and the gaming machine error status signal are the main board. 31. The door opening signal, the prize ball signal 1, and the gaming machine error state signal input to the main board 31 are not transmitted through the game control microcomputer 560 but directly passed through the main board 31 to the terminal board 160. Output externally. Also in this case, the door opening signal, the prize ball signal 1 and the gaming machine error state signal input to the main board 31 pass through the gaming control microcomputer 560 once and then externally output via the terminal board 160. You may be made to do.

  Further, for example, in addition to the symbol determination frequency 1 signal as a symbol determination frequency signal for notifying the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the symbol determination frequency 2 signal may be externally output via the terminal board 160. In this case, for example, in order to notify the number of fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol by externally outputting the symbol determination number 2 signal as a signal for notifying only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol. The signal may be configured to be externally output as a signal of the number of symbol determinations. With such a configuration, on the external device side such as a hall computer, in addition to the number of fluctuations of only the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the fluctuation of only the second special symbol The number of times can also be grasped.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 9, the detection signal of the count switch 23, the detection signals of the winning opening switches 29a and 30a, and the detection signal of the winning confirmation switch 14b are input to the bits 0 and 2 to 4 of the input port 0, respectively. . In addition, a radio wave sensor signal, a magnet sensor signal, a door opening signal, and prize ball information are input to the bits 4 to 7 of the input port 1, respectively. In addition, bits 0 to 4 of the input port 2 respectively include a detection signal of the first start port switch 13a, a detection signal of the second start port switch 14a, a detection signal of the gate switch 32a, and a clear switch from the power supply board 910. A detection signal and a power-off signal are input.

  FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram showing the internal configuration of the terminal board 160. In the terminal board 160 shown in FIG. 10, the upper left connectors CN-1 and CN-2 are connectors for connecting cables for transmitting signals from the main board 31, and the lower left connector CN-3 is This is a connector for connecting a cable for transmitting a signal from the payout control board 37 via the main board 31. The right connectors CN1 to CN10 are connectors for connecting cables that transmit signals to an external device such as a hall computer. The terminal board 160 is mounted with semiconductor relays (PhotoMOS relays) PC1 to PC10 as driver circuits.

  When the cable from the main board 31 is connected to the connectors CN-1 and CN-2, various signals are input from the main board 31 (game control microcomputer 560) to the terminal board 160. Specifically, the symbol determination number 1 signal is input to the terminal “2” of the connector CN-1, the start port signal is input to the terminal “3” of the connector CN-1, and the terminal “4” of the connector CN-1 is input. 1 signal is input to the terminal “5” of the connector CN-1, 2 signals are input to the terminal “6” of the connector CN-1, and 3 signals of the jackpot are input to the terminal “7” of the connector CN-1. To the terminal “8” of the connector CN-1, a winning signal is input to the terminal “9” of the connector CN-1, and a terminal “9” of the connector CN-2 is input. A high-accuracy signal is input.

  Further, when the cable from the payout control board 37 is connected to the connector CN-3 via the main board 31, a signal from the payout control board 37 (the payout control microcomputer 370) is input to the terminal board 160. The Specifically, the prize ball information is input to the terminal “9” of the connector CN-3.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the terminal board 160, the signal line of the reference potential is connected to the terminal “1” of the connector CN-1, the connector CN-2, and the connector CN-3, the signal lines are branched, Are connected to the input terminal “1” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10. The signal lines connected to the terminals “2” to “9” of the connector CN-1, the connector “9” of the connector CN-2, and the connector “9” of the connector CN-3 are each 1KΩ resistance R1. Are connected to the input terminal “2” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 via R10. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “4” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are connected to the terminals “1” of the connectors CN1 to CN10, respectively. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “3” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are connected to the terminals “2” of the connectors CN1 to CN10, respectively.

  In the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10, when a signal current flows through the input terminal, the light emitting element (LED) on the input side emits light. The emitted light is applied to the photoelectric element (solar cell) provided opposite to the LED through the transparent silicon. The photoelectric element that has received the light is exchanged for voltage according to the amount of light, and this voltage passes through the control circuit to charge the MOSFET gate of the output section. When the MOSFET gate voltage supplied from the photoelectric element reaches the set voltage value, the MOSFET becomes conductive and turns on the load. When the signal current at the input terminal is cut off, the light emitting element (LED) stops emitting light. When the light emission of the LED stops, the voltage of the photoelectric element decreases, and when the voltage supplied from the photoelectric element decreases, the gate load of the MOSFET is rapidly discharged by the control circuit. With this control circuit, the MOSFET is turned off and the load is turned off.

  By the operation of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 as described above, signals input from the input side connector CN-1, connector CN-2, and connector CN-3 are transmitted to the output side connectors CN1 to CN10, and a hall computer or the like. Output to an external device. Specifically, the design CN count 1 signal is output from the connector CN1, the start signal is output from the connector CN2, the jackpot signal is output from the connector CN3, the jackpot signal is output from the connector CN4, and the connector CN5 is output. Three jackpot signals are output, a time signal is output from the connector CN6, a winning signal is output from the connector CN7, a security signal is output from the connector CN8, a high-probability medium signal is output from the connector CN9, and a prize is output from the connector CN10. Sphere information is output. The assignment of connectors to each external output signal on terminal board 160 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the security signal may be output from the end connector (for example, connector CN10) provided on the terminal board 160.

  Note that the winning signal output from the connector CN7 indicates that a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 balls) of winning balls is satisfied (the first start winning port 13, This is a signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the second start winning port 14, the big winning port, and the normal winning ports 29, 30. The award ball has not been paid out. By confirming the winning signal, it is possible to recognize the expected number of prize balls to be paid out by an external device such as a hall computer.

  Also, the prize ball information output from the connector CN10 is that a specific number (10 balls in this embodiment) of prize balls has been paid out (the ball payout device 97 is driven and the prize balls are actually paid out). This is a signal indicating that By confirming the prize ball information, the number of prize balls actually paid out can be recognized by an external device such as a hall computer. Also, by confirming the planned number of prize balls indicated by the winning signal and the number of prize balls already paid out indicated by the prize ball information, whether or not the prize balls have been paid out normally and the number of excess or insufficient prize balls are determined. It can be recognized by an external device such as a hall computer.

  The security signal output from the connector CN8 is a signal indicating the security state of the gaming machine. Specifically, as will be described later, when it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred based on the detection result of the second starting opening switch 14a and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b. In addition, a security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 4 minutes). With such a configuration, a fraudulent act such as recognizing that the number of winnings to the second start winning opening 14 is larger than the actual winning number using radio waves or the like has been performed. Can be recognized on the external device side.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming machine is turned on and the initialization process is executed, the security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). . By configuring as such, it is recognized that the initialization process has been executed at an unnatural timing (for example, even after all the gaming machine power reset operations have been completed when the amusement store is opened). By making it possible, the external device such as a hall computer can recognize the possibility that an unauthorized act of illegally resetting the power of the gaming machine and aiming for a big hit at the power reset timing is performed. it can.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the abnormal winning is detected and the initialization process (for example, the operation of the clear switch is performed when the power to the gaming machine is turned on) A common security signal is output from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 to the outside when the processing such as clearing the stored content is executed. This is because the initialization process is usually performed only when the game machine power is reset when the amusement store is opened, so the terminal is used for a signal that is output only once a day. Providing a dedicated connector or semiconductor relay on the substrate 160 is not efficient and wasteful. Therefore, in this embodiment, an external output signal is configured by outputting a security signal from the common connector CN8 when an abnormal winning is detected and when an initialization process is executed. The waste of lines and circuit elements is reduced. That is, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of parts of a mechanism for outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer and complication of wiring work.

  The signal output from the common connector as a security signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, not only abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14, but abnormal winning at the first starting winning opening 13, the large winning opening, and the normal winning openings 29, 30 is detected, and a common connector of the terminal board 160 is detected. You may comprise so that external output is possible as a security signal from CN8. In this case, for example, the first start winning opening 13, the big winning opening, and the normal winning openings 29 and 30 are also used as a switch for detecting the winning of the game ball, similarly to the second starting winning opening 14. Two different types of switches (proximity switch and photo sensor) may be provided, and the presence / absence of an abnormal prize may be determined according to the same determination method as that for the second start winning opening 14.

  Further, for example, when abnormal magnetism is detected by a magnet sensor provided in a gaming machine or when abnormal radio waves are detected by a radio wave sensor provided in a gaming machine, a security signal is output from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. You may comprise so that external output is possible. In addition, for example, when an abnormality of various switches provided in the gaming machine is detected (for example, when occurrence of a short circuit is detected by determining that the input value has exceeded the threshold value), a common terminal board 160 is used. The connector CN8 may be configured so that it can be externally output as a security signal.

  As described above, even if there is an abnormal winning at the grand prize opening, an abnormal magnetic error, or an abnormal radio wave error, it is possible to output only one signal line as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. If connected, an error detection can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer, and the work load related to error detection can be reduced.

  In the case of detecting an abnormal winning at the big winning opening, when determining based on the number of detections by the count switch 23 and the number of detections by the winning confirmation switch being a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In addition, the count switch 23 when the value of the special symbol process flag is not a value indicating that the game is a big hit game (for example, when the value of the special symbol process flag is not 5 or more, see FIG. 39). Even when a game ball is detected by the above, it may be determined that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred. In addition, in this way, when it is determined that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred based on the detection result of the count switch 23 and the winning confirmation switch, or an abnormal to the big winning opening based on the value of the special symbol process flag. Even when it is determined that a winning has occurred, the security signal is externally output by setting a predetermined time (for example, 4 minutes) in the security signal information timer, as in step S128 in the switch normality / abnormality check process. You can do it.

  Further, for example, even when a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected, it can be externally output as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. May be. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a communication error has occurred based on failure to receive a connection OK command or a prize ball number reception command (to be described later) from the payout control microcomputer 370, and the terminal The security signal may be externally output from the common connector CN8 of the board 160. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a communication error has occurred based on the value of any error bit in the status register (not shown) of the serial communication circuit 505 being set, The security signal may be externally output from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160.

  In addition to the signal line and connector CN8 for security signals, a signal line and connector dedicated to communication errors between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 may be provided on the terminal board 160. When a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected, an external device such as a hall computer is transmitted via the terminal board 160 as a signal different from the security signal. May be output.

  In addition to the signal line for security signal output, detection of initialization processing, detection of abnormal winning at the first start winning opening 13, detection of abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14, and big winning opening A separate signal line is provided for detection of abnormal prize winning, detection of abnormal magnetic error, detection of abnormal radio wave error, and detection of communication error. From the terminal board 160, corresponding to each error together with the security signal. An external output signal may also be output to an external device such as a hall computer. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an error has occurred by checking the security signal, and further, by checking the signal output for each type of error, the type of error can be determined on the amusement store side. Can be confirmed. Therefore, when an amusement store requires a confirmation of the type of error, an external output signal for each error type is provided separately from the security signal, so that an external output that better meets the needs of the amusement store can be provided. Can be done. On the other hand, in the case of a game shop that only requests confirmation that some kind of error has occurred, only the security signal out of the externally output signals is connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Check it.

  As described above, by providing the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 on the terminal board 160, signal input from the outside to the inside of the gaming machine can be prevented, and as a result, illegal acts can be reliably prevented. In the above example, the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are provided on the terminal board 160. However, other relay elements such as a mechanical relay may be used instead of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the CPU 56 starts outputting a connection signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 (step S4). When the CPU 56 starts outputting the connection signal in step S4, the CPU 56 sends a connection signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 unless the power supply of the gaming machine is stopped or the output becomes impossible due to some communication error. Output continuously.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S5). By the processing in step S5, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S6), and proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, the state of the clear signal may be reconfirmed again after a predetermined delay time. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a hot start process for resuming the game using the data stored in the RAM 55 that has been backed up (step S91). Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S92), and proceeds to step S15. In addition, after setting in step S92, a backup command is transmitted after serial communication circuit setting processing in step S15a described later is performed.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball-out flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for performing the above. An initial value (clear data) is also set in each timer (start port information storage timer, winning information storage timer, security signal information timer, etc.) used to output each external output signal described later.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used. After setting in step S13, an initialization command is transmitted after serial communication circuit setting processing in step S15a described later is performed.

  The CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) in the security signal information timer (step S14a). The security signal information timer is a timer for measuring the ON time of the security signal output from the terminal board 160. In this embodiment, an initialization process is performed when the gaming machine is turned on by executing an information output process (see S31) described later based on the fact that a predetermined time is set in the security signal information timer in step S14a. Is executed, a security signal is externally output for a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S15). In this case, the CPU 56 performs settings according to the random number circuit setting program stored in the ROM 54 in advance, so that the random number circuit 503 updates the random R value.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15a). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 54 in the serial communication circuit 505 in accordance with the serial communication circuit setting program, so that the serial communication circuit 505 performs serial communication with the payout control microcomputer. I do.

  When the serial communication circuit 505 is initialized, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15b). In this case, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing by executing processing according to the interrupt priority setting program 557.

  For example, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of each interrupt process according to a predetermined interrupt process priority table including the default priority of each interrupt process. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs initialization according to the interrupt processing priority table so as to preferentially execute an interrupt process whose cause is the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets an interrupt priority execution flag at the time of communication error indicating that priority is given to an interrupt process whose cause is an interrupt.

  In this embodiment, when a timer interrupt and an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 are generated at the same time, the CPU 56 preferentially performs an interrupt process by the timer interrupt.

  In addition, the default priority of each interrupt process can be changed by the user. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying an interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 sets the priority of interrupt processing according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  In addition to steps S15 to S15b, a part of the setting process of the random number circuit 503 and the serial communication circuit 505 is also executed in the process of step S5. For example, in step S5, an initial value is set in the baud rate register, communication setting register, interrupt control register, and status register of the serial communication circuit 505 as the built-in device register.

  In the initialization process of the main process, a process of setting “250” as an initial value to a prize ball number counter used for detecting a prize ball shortage error or a prize ball excess error, which will be described later, is also executed. Note that the process of setting the initial value in the prize ball number counter may be executed, for example, in the hot start process of step S91 or the process of sequentially setting each initial value in the work area of step S12. It suffices if it is executed before the process is shifted.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 first disables the interrupt (step S17), executes the initial value random number update process (step S18a) and the display random number update process (step S18b), The interrupt is permitted again (step S19). That is, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt disabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and interrupts enable state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are finished. To.

  The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot or whether to shift the gaming state to a probable state) Initial value of the count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a probability variation determining random number for generating, a normal random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as an effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the gaming machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  In addition, when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed by the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process also in the timer interrupt process described later (that is, the timer This is because the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process), so as to avoid conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  When the interrupt-permitted state is set in step S19, the timer interrupt or interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is permitted until the next processing in step S17 is executed and the interrupt-prohibited state is set. . When a timer interrupt occurs while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a timer interrupt process to be described later. When an interrupt request is generated from the serial communication circuit 505 while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 causes each interrupt process (communication error interrupt process, reception time interrupt, Load processing, transmission completion interrupt processing). In this embodiment, priority is given to the interrupt process before the timer interrupt or the interrupt request is set to be permitted by executing step S15b before the loop process from step S17 to step S19. Processing for setting or changing the order is performed.

  Next, the hot start process in step S91 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of hot start processing. In the hot start process, the CPU 56 first sets the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S9101), and sequentially stores the contents of the backup setting table in the work area (area in the RAM 55). Setting is performed (step S9102). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. Initialization data (for example, a prize ball process code, a prize ball process timer, a frame status display buffer, and a previous frame status display buffer, which will be described later) is set in the backup setting table. Has been. As a result of the processing in steps S9101 and S9102, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  The CPU 56 also outputs a high-probability output permission flag for permitting external output via the terminal board 160 of a high-probability signal indicating that the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state (probability change state). Is set (step S9103). Instead of unconditionally setting the high-accuracy medium output permission flag, it is first checked whether or not it is in a high-probability state (probability variation state) (specifically, the probability variation flag stored in the backup RAM). It is also possible to set the high-accuracy output permission flag on the condition that it is in a high-probability state (probability variation state). As such, at the start of power supply, the high-accuracy output permission flag may be set unconditionally, or the high-accuracy output flag may be set on the condition that it is in a high probability state (probability variation state). .

  In addition, the CPU 56 clears a prize information storage timer for measuring a prize signal output time, which will be described later (step S9104). In other words, in this embodiment, the value of the winning information storage timer is stored in the power-backed RAM 55 and is maintained for a predetermined time even when the power supply is stopped, but the process of step S9104 is executed. Cleared when power is restored. As described above, in this embodiment, in the common hot start process, the setting process of the high-accuracy output permission flag and the clearing process of the winning information storage timer can be executed, and the process routine is shared. The control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 is reduced.

  For example, in the backup setting table, a value for setting the high-accuracy output permission flag (for example, logical value “1”) or a value for clearing the winning information storage timer (for example, clear data “ 0 ") may also be set and step S9102 may be executed to turn on the high-accuracy output permission flag and clear the winning information storage timer. In this case, for example, based on the backup time setting table, the value of the high-accuracy medium output permission flag in the work area is set to the on state (for example, a logical value “1” is written), or a prize is awarded in the work area. Clear data may be written to the value of the information storage timer. By doing so, it is possible to use a single data table (setting table at the time of backup) to share the setting processing of the high-accuracy output permission flag and the clearing processing of the winning information storage timer, and the game control micro The control burden on the computer 560 can be further reduced.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A timer interrupt process that is activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Then, the CPU 56 detects switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the winning confirmation switch 14b, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a and 30a through the switch circuit 58. A signal is input and the input of each switch is detected (switch processing: step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37. Execute control to

  Next, the CPU 56 executes magnet sensor error notification processing for performing magnet sensor error notification based on the detection signal input from the magnet sensor (step S24).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating a random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control (determination random number update process: step S25). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol in the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit 505 and sending the effect control command (effect symbol command control process: step S30). . It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 outputs, for example, data such as a symbol determination number 1 signal, a start opening signal, a jackpot signal 1-3, a time reduction signal, a winning signal, a security signal, and a high accuracy signal supplied to the hall management computer. Information output processing is performed (step S31).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for transmitting / receiving (input / output) signals to / from the payout control microcomputer 370 via the serial communication circuit 505, and when a winning occurs, detection of the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, etc. Prize ball processing is performed for setting the number of prize balls based on the signal (step S32). In this embodiment, data indicating the number of winning balls is obtained by changing the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command in response to detection of winning based on the winning opening switch 29a, 30a being turned on. The set prize ball number command is output to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the serial communication circuit 505. The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set.

  In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). Further, in this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. Is output to the output port (step S34: output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S35).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S36). Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is the short time state, the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the short time state is set in the output buffer. When the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), state display control data for displaying a state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may do it.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a frame state output process for transmitting a frame state display command in which information indicating the error state of the gaming machine is set to the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to display the error state of the gaming machine. Execute (Step S39).

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S40), and the process ends.

  Next, the variation pattern of the effect design used in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. Variation patterns of reach PA1-4 and ultrashort PB1-1 are prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are shown as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 14, the re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 that is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. The non-reach PA1-2 variation pattern used when not reaching is a variation pattern for shortening variation, and the variation time of the effect design is shortened to a short time (1.5 seconds in this example). . Moreover, the fluctuation pattern of the super shortening PB1-1 used when not reaching is a fluctuation pattern for the super shortening fluctuation that further shortens the fluctuation time as compared with the non-reach PA1-2, and the variation time of the effect design is further shorter. The time is shortened to 0.9 seconds in this example. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3-Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3-SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3-Super PB3-4, Super shortened PB1-2, Special PG1-1-Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1-Special A variation pattern of PG2-2 is prepared. In FIG. 14, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the super shortening PB1-2 used when sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit is a fluctuation pattern of super shortening fluctuation (fluctuation time 0.9 seconds), and a reach effect is performed. The big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as it is. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden probability change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, when the super-shortened PB1-1 or the super-shortened PB1-2, which is the fluctuation pattern of the super-shortening variation, is used, the following effects are executed during the variation display of the effect symbols. . When the fluctuation pattern of the super shortened PB1-1 is used at the time of deviation fluctuation, the fluctuation display for extremely short 0.9 seconds is performed without the reach effect, and then the deviation symbol (reach deviation symbol) is used as it is as the final stop symbol. Both of them are “stopped symbols”) which are not so-called chance symbols, and are stopped and displayed. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern of the super shortened PB1-2 at the time of big hit fluctuation, the left, middle and right are displayed as the final stop symbol as it is after the fluctuation display for 0.9 seconds is performed without the reach effect. The jackpot symbols in the same pattern are stopped and displayed. In addition, as described above, “reach production” means that symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue to be a big hit symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol). Are in the same state as a combination of symbols with the same symbol), stopped, rocked, enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or multiple symbols fluctuated in the same symbol, It is an effect that is performed in a state (reach state) in which the possibility of a big hit is continued before the final result is displayed because the positions are changed.

  FIG. 15A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 15 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 15 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 15A is a jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 15B and 15C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 15B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. In addition, the numerical values described in FIGS. 15B and 15C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit A and sudden probability variation big hit B described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 15B and 15C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 15A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probability” shown in FIGS. 15B and 15C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15B and 15C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  15D and 15E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 15 (D) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 15E shows a case in which the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b determine that the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit”, “sudden probability big hit A”, and “sudden probability big hit B”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15D and 15E, the jackpot type determination table 131a has a total of 39 determinations for “sudden probability change big hit A” and “sudden probability change big hit B”. A value is assigned (determined as a sudden probability change big hit at a ratio of 39/100), whereas the big hit type determination table 131b has “sudden probability change big hit A” and “sudden probability change big hit B”. A case will be described in which 14 judgment values (however, in this example, there is no allocation for “sudden probability variation big hit A”) are assigned (determined as sudden probability variation big hit at a rate of 14/100). . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. In other words, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the second starting prize opening 14 and the second special symbol variation display is executed, the first special symbol is given to the first starting prize opening 13 by starting. The game value is high compared to the case where the fluctuation display is executed (in this example, the opening time of the big prize opening per time is as long as 29 seconds, and the gambling is high) "Is a high percentage. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15D and 15E, there are “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, “sudden probability big hit A” and “sudden probability big hit B” as the big hit types.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to a probable change state (high probability state) after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, it is changed to a probable change state). At the same time, the state is shifted to the time reduction state (see steps S170 and S178 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S135 described later).

  In this embodiment, there are two types of short-time states: a first short-time state and a second short-time state in which the variation time is further shortened compared to the first short-time state. In this embodiment, when controlled to the first short-time state, the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2 for shortening variation can be selected when it is determined to be out of sync with the normal state. As a result, the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol is reduced on average. Further, in the case of being controlled to the second short time state, only the fluctuation pattern of the super-shortening PB1-1 for the super-shortening fluctuation can be selected when it is determined to be out of place, and even when it is determined to be a big hit By making it possible to select only the fluctuation pattern of the super-shortening PB1-2 for ultra-shortening fluctuation (no reach effect or various roaring effects are performed), the variation time of special symbols and effect symbols is further reduced than in the first short-time state. Is done. In this embodiment, when the first short time state and the second short time state are comprehensively expressed, they are also simply expressed as “short time state”.

  In this embodiment, when the “probability big hit” is reached, after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is controlled and the first short time state is controlled. In addition, you may make it control to a 2nd time-short state while being controlled to a probability change state.

  In addition, you may make it also change the fluctuation time of a normal symbol further, when it is controlled to the 1st time-short state and when it is controlled to the 2nd time-short state. Specifically, when it is controlled to the first short time state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also shortened compared to the normal state, and the second short time state is controlled to display the fluctuation display of the ultrashort fluctuation. In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be further shortened. According to such a configuration, when the variation time of the special symbol is extremely short, the variation time of the normal symbol is also extremely short, thereby making it difficult for the second reserved memory to be lost, and the variation of the first special symbol. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player as much as possible.

  Further, the “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and is not shifted to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished, but is shifted only to the first short time state (step S167 described later). reference). It should be noted that when the “normal big hit” is reached, the second short time state may be controlled. Then, after the transition to the first time-short state, the first time-short state is maintained until the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S141 to S144 described later). . In this embodiment, even if a big hit occurs after the transition to the first time reduction state and before the execution of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays is finished, the first time reduction state ends (see step S135 described later). ).

  Further, in this embodiment, there are two types of sudden probability variation big hits: “sudden probability variation big hit A” and “sudden probability variation big hit B”. “Suddenly promising big hit B” is the same as “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, but the number of times of opening the big winning opening is the same at 15 times, but the opening time per time is as short as 0.1 seconds. It is a big hit, and after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state) and to the second time-short state (see steps S177 and S178 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S135 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit A” means that the number of times the big prize opening is opened is 15 times compared to “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, but the opening time per time is 0.1 second. It is a short big hit, and after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to a probability variation state (high probability state). However, whether or not the time-short state is controlled depends on the gaming state when the “suddenly probable big hit A” occurs. In this embodiment, when “probability sudden change big hit A” occurs when the probability change state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state), control is made to the probability change state after the big hit game ends. At the same time, it is controlled to the second time-short state (see steps S174 and S178 described later). In addition, when it is “probability sudden change big hit A” when it is in the probability change state (high probability state) and not in the short time state (low base state), it is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game and the first It is controlled to the time-short state (see steps S175 and S178 described later). On the other hand, if it is “suddenly probable big hit A” when it is not in the probable state, it is controlled to the probable state only after the big hit game is over, and not in the short time state (ie, high probability / low base state). (Refer to N and S178 in step S172 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S135 described later).

  In other words, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when suddenly probable big hit A or small hit, the common bonus is controlled during the common effect execution period after the big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state ends. During the performance execution period, a common performance is performed in a manner in which it is not possible to recognize whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) is present (specifically, a common background color (for example, regardless of whether or not the probability variation state is present) , Yellow), the fluctuation display is executed). In such a case, even if the state is not controlled in the short-time state, and suddenly shifts to the short-time state (high base state) based on the fact that the probable big hit A has occurred, The frequency at which the variation time is shortened increases, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased, so that it is possible for the player to guess that the game is in a probable variation state even though the common effect is being executed. As a result, the production effect of the common performance is significantly reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit A suddenly occurs when not in the probability variation state, it is controlled only in the probability variation state (high probability state) and not in the short time state (high base state). By doing this, it is difficult to guess whether or not it is in a probable state during execution of the common effect.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the variation display is executed with a background color (for example, red) that can be recognized as the probability variation state, and the gaming state is the short-time state. Is displayed in a background color (for example, green) that can be recognized as a short-time state, and when the gaming state is a normal state, a background color (for example, blue) that can be recognized as a normal state The variable display is executed by. When the common effect is in the execution period, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state, the variation display is executed with the common background color (for example, yellow), so that the probability variation state is achieved. Whether it exists or not is made unrecognizable.

  In addition, the aspect of a common effect is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment, You may perform with the effect aspects other than the aspect which displays a common background color. For example, in the case of a configuration in which it is possible to recognize whether or not it is in the probability variation state in the variation direction of the production symbol (for example, in the normal state, the symbol is scrolled in the vertical direction and the variation display is performed, whereas in the probability variation state, it is horizontal. The symbol is scrolled in the direction and the variable display is performed.) During the execution period of the common effect, the symbol is scrolled in the vertical direction to display the variable regardless of whether the gaming state is the probable state or not. By executing the above, it may be made unrecognizable whether or not it is in the probability variation state. Also, for example, in the case where the type of effect symbol is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not it is in a probable state (for example, in the normal state, an Arabic numeral effect symbol is used, whereas in the probability variable state, a Chinese numeral effect symbol is used. If the game state is in the probabilistic state, the variable display is performed using the Arabic numerals in the probable state, regardless of whether or not the game state is in the probable state. Whether or not it exists may be made unrecognizable. In addition, for example, in a case where it is configured to be able to recognize whether or not the character to appear in the production is in a certain change state (for example, the character A is used in the normal state while the character B is used in the certain change state). During the execution period of the common performance, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is recognized whether or not it is the probability variation state by executing the variable display using the common character C. It may be disabled.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when “small hit” is reached, the big winning opening is opened 15 times for 0.1 seconds, and the big hit gaming state due to “suddenly probable big hit” Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained (described later). Steps S141 to S145). By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15D and 15E, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, it is not always controlled to the second short time state. In the case where the judgment value is assigned to both the sudden probability variation big hit A and the sudden probability variation big hit B that is always controlled to the second short-time state, while the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, A judgment value is assigned only to the sudden probability variation big hit B which is always controlled to the second short time state. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the second when the probability variation big hit suddenly occurs is compared with the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. The interest rate for the game is improved by increasing the ratio controlled to the short-time state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit A suddenly occurs while being controlled to the first time-short state, the second time-short state is controlled. Therefore, even when a sudden probability change big hit with low game value occurs, a case can be provided that develops from the first short time state to a more advantageous second short time state, and a sudden probability change big hit with low game value has occurred. In this case, the disappointment of the player can be prevented as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15D and 15E, a decision value is assigned to the probability variation big hit A only when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. In the case of executing the special symbol fluctuation display, the case where the judgment value is not assigned to the sudden probability variation big hit A is shown. On the other hand, a determination value may be assigned. Even in such a configuration, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the second short time when the sudden probability change big hit occurs compared to the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. There is no change in the ratio that is controlled by the state becomes high. That is, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the short time state (high base state), it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 (and the second special symbol variable display is preferentially executed). Since the second special symbol variation display is easy to be executed, the fact that the second special symbol variation display is executed means that the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state (high base state). Is expensive. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the second game is controlled based on the fact that the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state (high base state) even when suddenly probable big hit A. The ratio controlled to the short time state becomes high.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values that are compared with a random 1 value, and correspond to "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", "sudden probability variation jackpot A", and "sudden probability variation jackpot B" respectively. Judgment value (big hit type judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as the type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value.

  FIGS. 16A to 16E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, and includes normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, ultra-short CA3-4, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 16A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 16B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132E selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the second short time state, the second short time big hit variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 16C is used. As shown in FIG. 16C, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second short time state, the determination value is assigned only to the variation pattern type of the super shortened CA3-4, and the normal big hit Even if it is a case where the probability variation is a big hit, only the fluctuation pattern of the super shortening PB1-2 of the super shortening fluctuation can be selected. Even when the second short time state is controlled, it is possible to select a variation pattern with normal reach or super reach at a low rate. Even in such a configuration, by making it possible to select the fluctuation pattern of the super-shortening PB1-2 of the super-shortening fluctuation, the fluctuation time can be further reduced by averaging compared to the first short-time state.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D and 132E used when the big hit type is “sudden probability change big hit A” or “sudden probability change big hit B”, for example, the big hit types such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 are used. Is other than “sudden probability variation big hit A” or “sudden probability variation big hit B”, a judgment value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no judgment value is assigned. Therefore, when controlling to the big hit gaming state according to the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit A” or “suddenly probable big hit B”, “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” "Can be determined to be a different variation pattern type.

  However, in this embodiment, in the case of “sudden probability variation big hit A” among sudden probability variation big hits, the judgment value is assigned only to the special CA4-1. By doing so, in this embodiment, the change pattern that can be selected is the same for sudden sudden change big hit A and small hit case, and when the common effect described later is executed, It prevents the situation where it is recognized that there is.

  FIG. 16F is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132F. The variation pattern type determination table 132F for small hits has a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 17A to 17D are explanatory diagrams illustrating the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Of these, FIG. 17 (A) shows a variation pattern type determination table 135A for loss that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total pending storage number is less than three. FIG. 17B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 17C shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135C used when the gaming state is the first short time state. FIG. 17D shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135D used when the gaming state is the second short time state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, a case is shown in which separate variation pattern type determination tables 135B and 135C are used for the case where the gaming state is the first short-time state and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. However, it may be configured to use a common deviation variation pattern type determination table for the case of the first short time state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 17C, a case where a single variation pattern type determination table 135C for the first time reduction is used is shown, but as a variation pattern type determination table for deviation for the first time reduction state. A plurality of deviation variation pattern determination tables (tables with different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used. Similarly, in the example shown in FIG. 17 (D), a case is shown in which one variation variation pattern type determination table 135D for the second time reduction is used, but the variation pattern type for deviation for the second time reduction state is used. As the determination table, a plurality of outlier variation pattern determination tables (tables with different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3. A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, super CA2-7, and super shortened CA2-8 is set.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the first short-time state, the first variation-time variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 17C is used. As shown in FIG. 17C, in this embodiment, when controlled to the first time-shortening state, the variation pattern of non-reach CA2-3 including the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-2 of shortening variation. The type can be selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the second short time state, the deviation pattern type determination table for the second short time shown in FIG. 17D is used. As shown in FIG. 17D, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second time-shortening state, the fluctuation of the super shortened CA2-8 including the fluctuation pattern of the super shortened PB1-1 of the super shortened fluctuation. Only the pattern type can be selected. Even when the second short time state is controlled, it is possible to select a variation pattern with normal reach or super reach at a low rate. Even in such a configuration, by making it possible to select the fluctuation pattern of the super-shortening PB1-1 of the super-shortening fluctuation, the fluctuation time can be further reduced by averaging than the first short-time state.

  It should be noted that only when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the time-short state is controlled, the time-varying variation pattern type determination table for time reduction shown in FIG. 17C or FIG. 17D is selected. In the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation time may not be shortened by using the normal variation variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. By doing so, the variation display of the first special symbol which is disadvantageous for the player is executed more than the variation display of the second special symbol, and the player cannot receive the benefit of the advantageous state. Can be prevented.

  18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, super CA3-3, and super shortened CA3-4. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is either special CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18A, the variation pattern type includes a normal CA 3-1 that includes a variation pattern that includes only normal reach, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that includes normal reach and pseudo-ream. A normal CA 3-2, a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with a super reach), and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of a super shortened variation The case where it classify | categorizes into a certain super shortening CA3-4 is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, as the variation pattern types, the special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and the special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 18B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, and a special effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  20 and 21 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 14, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H).

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for sudden start of sudden probability change big hit when it is a sudden chance big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command for small hit. Also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that the jackpot game is normally a big jackpot (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). is there. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state (not including the probability variation state). Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is in the probability change state. In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a common time-short state background designation command is transmitted without distinguishing between the first time-short state and the second time-short state, but the game state is further subdivided. A first short-time state background designation command for designating a background display when in a short-time state and a second short-time state background designation command for designating a background display when the gaming state is in a second short-time state are provided. Also good.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. A serial communication circuit is also mounted on the production control board 80 side, and the game control microcomputer 560 uses a serial communication method to control the production control command to be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Also good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  In addition to the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the command transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means includes a frame state display command (see FIG. 38) and a door opening winning prize abnormal command ( 49).

  Next, the prize ball process (step S32) in the main process will be described. First, payout control signals (connection signals, prize ball information) and payout control commands transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control means to the payout control means. In this embodiment, a connection signal and prize ball information are transmitted and received as control signals between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 in order to perform various controls relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 22, the connection signal is output when the main board 31 rises (when the game control means starts the game control process), and notifies the payout control board 37 that the main board 31 has risen. This is a signal (connection signal for the main board 31). The connection signal indicates that the prize ball can be paid out. The connection signal is output via the I / O port 57 and the output circuit 67A of the game control microcomputer 560, and is used for payout control via the input circuit 373A and the I / O port 372e of the payout control microcomputer 370. It is input to the microcomputer 370. The connection signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted through one signal line. Note that the connection signal is ready to be output by setting an initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection signal of the output port 0 by the process of step S4 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, in step S34). Although it is output by processing, it may be output at the timing of step S4). The prize ball information is information for notifying the main board 31 that ten prize balls have been detected each time ten prize balls are paid out on the payout control board 37 side. . The prize ball information is output via the I / O port 372a and the output circuit 373B of the payout control microcomputer 370, and the game control is performed via the input circuit 67B and the I / O port 57 of the game control microcomputer 560. To the microcomputer 560. The prize ball information is 1-bit data and is transmitted through one signal line.

  Similarly to the game control microcomputer 560, the payout control microcomputer 370 includes a serial communication circuit 380. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560 and the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control means and the payout control means. In this embodiment, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the payout control command is composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and is output as a control command indicating predetermined contents depending on the contents of the set 8-bit data.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 560 at regular intervals (1 s) in order to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is normal. Control command to be sent. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “10100000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 370 issues a connection confirmation command. Is a control command that is transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “1000xxxx”. Here, with regard to “xxxx” in the second byte of the connection OK command, as shown in FIG. 24, a winning ball error (a winning ball paying operation based on winning or a ball lending paying operation based on a ball lending request cannot be normally performed. An abnormal state that has become a state: Specifically, when a main control unconnected error, a payout switch error detection error 1, a payout switch error detection error 2, a payout case error, or a main control communication error (described later) occurs “1” is set to “x” of the first bit (bit 0). When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit (bit 1). When a ball break error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit (bit 2). In addition, when a payout number abnormality error occurs when the cumulative value of the number of payouts of prize balls and rental balls, which will be described later, reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2000), the fourth bit (bit 3) “1” is set to “x” of In this way, during the confirmation of the connection between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected. 560 can be notified. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the case where a value indicating a payout error (award ball error, full tank error, out of ball error, payout number error error) is set as a control state in the connection OK command is shown. A control state other than an error may be set in the connection OK command. For example, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a value indicating that a prize ball payout operation or a lending ball payout operation is in a control state to the connection OK command, and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 560. You may make it do.

  The award ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 15) of game balls for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 based on the occurrence of a win. . The content of the prize ball number command data is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxx”. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is detected by one of the winning port switches 29a and 30a. Then, 10 prize balls are paid out. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, a prize ball number command “01010011” for notifying three prize balls is transmitted, and the prize opening switches 29a, 29a, When a game ball is detected in any of 30a, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying 10 prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls is 15 A prize ball number command “01011111” for notifying the player is transmitted.

  The prize ball number acceptance command is a control command for notifying that the prize ball number specified by the prize ball quantity command has been accepted, and the payout control microcomputer 370 responds upon receipt of the prize ball quantity command. It is a control command transmitted as a signal. The content of the prize ball number reception command data is “70 (H)”, that is, “01110000”.

  The award ball end command is a control command indicating that the award ball operation (award ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command that the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits based on the end of the award ball operation. The data content of the winning ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”.

  The command for preparing a prize ball is a control command for notifying that a prize ball movement has not been completed due to a long time for a prize ball movement, a rental ball movement or a predetermined error. is there. The contents of the data of the winning ball preparation command are “4x (H)”, that is, “0100xxxx”. Here, with regard to “xxxx” in the second byte of the command for preparing a prize ball, as shown in FIG. 24, when a prize ball error occurs, “1” is set to “1” in the first bit (bit 0). Is set. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit (bit 1). When a ball break error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit (bit 2). In addition, when a payout number abnormality error occurs when the cumulative value of the number of payouts of prize balls and rental balls, which will be described later, reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2000), the fourth bit (bit 3) “1” is set to “x” of In this way, the payout control microcomputer 370 receives a prize ball when the prize ball operation takes a long time, or during a lending ball operation or when a predetermined error occurs during the execution of the prize ball operation. The game control microcomputer 560 can be notified that the operation has not ended, and the contents of the error can also be notified to the game control microcomputer 560. As in the case of the connection OK command, the award ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits in accordance with the error state (by changing the predetermined bits). Note that the command for preparing a prize ball is not only in a state where an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also in a state where the prize ball payout operation cannot be started immediately because the ball rental operation is in progress, This command (signal) is output even in the running state (the state in which the payout operation for the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command has not been completed). In the example shown in FIG. 24, a case in which a value indicating a payout error (prize ball error, full tank error, out of ball error, payout number error error) is set as a control state in the command for preparing a prize ball is shown. However, a control state other than an error may be set in the connection OK command. For example, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a value indicating that the prize ball payout operation or the lending ball payout operation is in the control state in the award ball preparation command, and the game control microcomputer 560. You may make it transmit to.

  In this embodiment, the connection confirmation signal is realized by a connection confirmation command of the payout control commands, the response signal is realized by a connection OK command, the payout number signal is realized by a prize ball number command, and the acceptance signal is It is realized by a prize ball number acceptance command, a payout end signal is realized by a prize ball end command, and a payout signal is realized by a prize ball preparation command.

  25 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of the control signal shown in FIG. 22 and the control command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the connection signal is output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67A and is input to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. The prize ball information is output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B, and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 67B. A prize ball signal 1 and a gaming machine error state signal, which will be described later, are also output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 67B. May be. The door opening signal may also be output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 67B.

  Of the control commands, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are output from the serial circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560 and input to the serial circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. Of the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball number reception command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial circuit 380 built in the payout control microcomputer 370, and the game control microcomputer 560 It is input to the built-in serial circuit 505. In FIG. 25, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 side and a payout control microcomputer) are used as signal lines for serial communication. 370 shows a signal line for transmitting a command from 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 side. A signal line for transmitting a command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 side, and a signal line for transmitting a command from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 side. May be configured as separate signal lines.

  Next, the prize ball process (step S32) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prize ball processing in step S32. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), the prize ball command output counter addition process (step S501), the prize ball control process (step S502), and the prize ball counter subtraction process (step S503). ).

  In the prize ball command output counter addition process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 27 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “5”) is set to the start address of the prize ball number table, and then the lower address of the switch-on buffer, the lower address of the prize ball command output counter, the switch input bit designation value, The prize ball number data for designating the number of prize balls is sequentially set. The prize ball command output counter is a counter that counts the number of prizes received in the prize opening, and is set in the ROM 54, for example. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a corresponding prize ball command output counter for each number of prize balls (0 to 15). In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a prize ball command output counter 1 corresponding to the prize ball number “15” and prize ball command output counters 2, 3 (2) corresponding to the prize ball number “10”. Corresponding to the three normal winning openings 29 and 30) and prize ball command output counters 4 and 5 corresponding to the number of prize balls “3”. Each prize ball command output counter is counted up by prize ball command output counter addition processing, as will be described later. If the prize ball command output counter 1 set in the prize ball number table is not 0, the CPU 56 indicates the prize ball number (15) based on the prize ball number data designating the prize ball number (15). The data is set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the set winning ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. The CPU 56 determines the number of prize balls (10) if the value of the prize ball command output counter 1 set in the prize ball number table is 0 and the value of the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 is not 0. Data indicating the number of winning balls (10) is set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the set winning ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. To do. Further, the CPU 56 must set the value of the prize ball command output counter 1 and the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 set in the prize ball number table to 0, and the value of the prize ball command output counters 4 and 5 must be 0. For example, data indicating the number of winning balls (3) is set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command based on the winning ball number data designating the number of winning balls (3), and the set winning ball number command is set. Is sent to the payout control microcomputer 370. In FIG. 27, the switch-on buffer 1 corresponds to the input port 0, and the switch-on buffer 2 corresponds to the input port 2.

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are flowcharts showing the prize ball command output counter addition processing in step S501. In the prize ball command output counter addition process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) sets the start address of the prize ball number table to the pointer (step S5101). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S5102).

  Next, the CPU 56 increments the pointer value by 1 (step S5103), loads the lower address of the switch-on buffer pointed to by the pointer into the lower byte of the pointer buffer (step S5104), and loads the switch-on buffer pointed by the pointer buffer into the register. (Step S5105). Next, the CPU 56 increments the value of the pointer by 1 (step S5106), and loads the lower address of the prize ball command output counter pointed to by the pointer into the lower byte of the pointer buffer (step S5107). Next, the CPU 56 increments the value of the pointer by 1 (step S5108), and calculates the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer loaded into the register and the switch winning bit designation value pointed to by the pointer (step S5109). Then, the CPU 56 increases the value of the pointer by 1 (step S5110). When the pointer value is incremented by 1 in step S5110, the pointer value indicates the address where the prize ball number data in the prize ball number table is stored.

  Next, if the calculation result in step S5109 is 0 (Y in step S5111), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not in the on state, the CPU 56 decreases the number of processes by 1 (step S5128). If NO is 0, the process is terminated. If the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S5103 (step S5129).

  If the calculation result in step S5109 is not 0 (N in step S5111), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the CPU 56 performs processing for exchanging the pointer buffer value and the pointer value. This is performed (step S5112). In this case, the value of the pointer indicates the address where the prize ball number data in the prize ball number table is stored by executing the process of step S5110, and the value of the pointer buffer is the value of step S5107. Since the lower address of the prize ball command output counter should have been loaded by executing the above process, the value of the pointer buffer becomes the number of prize balls by executing the exchange process in step S5112. The table indicates the address where the prize ball number data is stored, and the value of the pointer indicates the lower address of the prize ball command output counter.

  Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the prize ball command output counter pointed to by the pointer (step S5113). However, when a carry occurs in the value of the prize ball command output counter as a result of the addition, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the prize ball command output counter and restores the original value (steps S5114 and S5115). Then, the process proceeds to step S5116. In steps S5113 to S5115, the CPU 56 first loads the value of the prize ball command output counter into the register, adds 1 to the value of the register, and that no carry has occurred in the value of the register after the addition. After confirming, the value after addition may be stored in the prize ball command output counter. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the waste of subtracting again after adding the value of the prize ball command output counter.

  Next, the CPU 56 counts the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls based on the detection of winning in any one of the winning winning openings (start winning winning openings 13, 14, large winning opening, ordinary winning openings 29, 30). The lower address of the winning counter is loaded into the lower byte of the pointer (step S5116). Next, the CPU 56 loads the prize ball number data pointed to by the pointer buffer (step S5117). Next, the CPU 56 reads the value of the winning counter pointed by the pointer, and adds the read value to the number of winning balls indicated by the winning ball number data loaded in step S5117 (step S5118). By executing the calculation of step S5118, the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls obtained by adding the number of winning balls for newly generated winning balls is obtained. Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the pointer (step S5119).

  In this embodiment, in the ROM 54, the winning information storage counter is set in the area of the address immediately before the area where the winning counter is set. The winning information storage counter is a counter for counting the number of possible output of winning signals. For example, if the value of the winning information storage counter is 1, a winning signal is output once in an information output process described later. If the value of the winning information storage counter is 2, control for outputting the winning signal twice is performed in the information output process described later. In this embodiment, the pointer value is decremented by 1 in step S5119, so that the pointer value indicates the lower address of the prize ball information output counter.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls calculated in step S5118 is equal to or greater than a predetermined winning output determination value (10 in this example) (step S5120). If the cumulative value of the planned number of winning balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined winning output determination value (10 in this example), the CPU 56 determines a predetermined winning output determination value from the cumulative value of the planned number of winning balls calculated in step S5118. (10 in this example) corresponding to is subtracted (step S5121). Then, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the winning information storage counter pointed to by the pointer (step S5122). However, when a carry occurs in the value of the winning information storage counter as a result of the addition, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning information storage counter and restores the original value (steps S5123 and S5124). Then, the process returns to step S5120. In steps S5122 to S5124, the CPU 56 first loads the value of the winning information storage counter into the register, adds 1 to the register value, and confirms that no carry has occurred in the register value after the addition. After confirmation, the value after addition may be stored in the winning information storage counter. By doing so, it is possible to prevent wasteful re-subtraction after adding the value of the winning information storage counter.

  On the other hand, if the cumulative value of the estimated number of winning balls calculated in step S5118 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined winning output determination value (10 in this example) (that is, less than 9), the process proceeds to step S5125.

  By executing the processing of steps S5120 to S5124, in this embodiment, every time a predetermined number of payout conditions are satisfied (every time 10 winning balls are won), the winning information storage counter The value is incremented by 1, and a winning signal is output to the outside by an information output process described later.

  In addition, the cumulative value of the planned number of prize balls calculated in step S5118 may be 20 or more. For example, if the count value of the winning counter is 9, and a winning to the big winning opening occurs and 15 new winning balls are generated, the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls in step S5118. Will be required as 24. In this case, it is determined as Y in step S5120, and the value of the winning information storage counter is incremented by 1 in step S5122 (in this case, the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls is subtracted by 10 in the process of step S5121 to become 14). ) Once again, it is determined as Y in step S5120, the value of the prize information storage counter is incremented by 1 in step S5122, and the value of the prize information storage counter is incremented by 2 while one prize ball command output counter addition process is executed. Will be.

  In this embodiment, in the prize ball command output counter addition process during the prize ball process, whether or not the cumulative value of the planned number of prize balls is 10 or more by executing the processes of steps S5120 to S5124. It is shown that the control is performed so that the winning information storage counter is added and the winning signal is output, but the winning signal output processing method is limited to that shown in this embodiment. I can't. For example, in the prize ball command output counter addition process, only the prize counter addition process is performed. In the information output process in step S31, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter is 10 or more. If there is, it may be controlled to output a winning signal. In this case, similarly to the above, if the value of the winning counter is 20 or more, in the information output process, the process of determining whether or not the winning counter value is 10 or more is repeatedly executed, and the value of the winning information storage counter is determined. May be processed so that the winning signal can be output twice.

  In addition, for example, in this embodiment, after the winning information storage counter is updated, a winning signal is externally output based on the value of the winning information storage counter in the information output processing described later. Instead of using the winning information storage counter, if it is determined in step S5120 that the accumulated value is 10 or more, the winning signal external output processing may be immediately performed within the winning ball command output counter addition processing. . In this case, in this embodiment, the result accumulated value of the calculation in step S5118 is 10 or more and less than 20, and it is necessary to output the winning signal once, and the result accumulated value of the calculation in step S5118 is 20 or more (this In the embodiment, there are two cases where it is necessary to output the winning signal twice, never exceeding 30). Therefore, for example, as a table for outputting a winning signal, a table for outputting a winning signal once (a table in which the ON time and OFF time of one winning signal are set) and a winning signal are continuously provided. A table for outputting twice (a table in which the on time and off time of the winning signal for two times are set) may be prepared. Then, if the calculated accumulated value is 10 or more and less than 20, a control for outputting the winning signal once outside is performed in the winning ball command output counter addition process using the table for outputting the winning signal once. If the calculated cumulative value is 20 or more, a table for outputting the winning signal twice is used, and the control for outputting the winning signal twice continuously in the winning ball command output counter addition process is performed. May be.

  If the cumulative value calculated in step S5118 exceeds 20, as described above, the winning signal is continuously generated in the winning ball command output counter adding process using the table for outputting the winning signal twice. In the prize ball command output counter addition process, the determination process of step S5120 is repeated until the calculation result becomes less than 10, and the prize signal is externally output twice continuously. It may be. Also, for example, when the winning ball command output counter addition process executed within one timer interrupt is performed so that a winning signal is output only once, and when the next timer interrupt is executed, the winning ball command output counter addition process is executed. The next winning signal may be externally output based on the accumulated value being 10 or more.

  Next, in step S5125, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the pointer value (therefore, the pointer value returns to the state indicating the lower address of the winning counter). Next, the CPU 56 stores the calculation result of the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls in the winning counter indicated by the pointer (step S5126). In this case, if the process proceeds to step S5125 and subsequent steps without being determined as Y once in step S5120, the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls obtained in step S5118 is stored as it is in the winning counter. become. If it is determined as Y in step S5120 and the processing from step S5121 is executed, the cumulative value of the planned number of winning balls after subtraction is stored in the winning counter in step S5121. As a result of the determination process in step S5120 and the subtraction process in step S5121, the value less than 10 is always stored in the winning counter in step S5126.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of exchanging the pointer buffer value and the pointer value (step S5127). In this case, since the address at which the winning ball number data in the winning ball number table is stored is saved in the pointer buffer by executing the process of step S5112, the processing of step S5127 is executed. The pointer value is returned to the state indicating the address where the prize ball number data in the prize ball number table is stored again.

  Then, the CPU 56 reduces the number of processes by 1 (step S5128), ends the process if the number of processes is 0, and returns to step S5103 if the number of processes is not 0 (step S5129).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control process in step S502. In the prize ball control process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes any one of steps S521 to S525 in accordance with the value of the prize ball process code.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the prize ball transmission process 1 (step S521) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is zero. In the prize ball transmission process 1, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a connection confirmation command to the payout control microcomputer (step S5211). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs processing for outputting a connection confirmation command to the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit 505. Then, the CPU 56 sets a value “1” indicating a prize ball connection confirmation process in the prize ball process code (step S5212), and sets a connection confirmation time 2 (for example, 10 seconds) in the prize ball process timer (step S5213). . If a connection OK command is not received even after 10 seconds have elapsed after transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the connection confirmation time 2 set in step S5213, the connection confirmation command is transmitted thereafter. It is controlled so as to extend the interval to 10 seconds. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S5213 is measured in the processing of steps S5227 and S5229, which will be described later, 10 seconds elapses without receiving a connection OK command, and Y in step S5227. When the determination is made, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S5228 and S5211).

  The prize ball process timer is set to a value (for example, an integer multiple of the interrupt period) in consideration of the interrupt period in the timer interrupt process executed by the game control microcomputer 560. This is because other timers used in the game control microcomputer 560, the payout control microcomputer 370, and the effect control microcomputer 100 (for example, main control communication control timer, payout control timer, re-payout waiting timer, The same applies to the prize ball information output timer and prize ball signal 1 output timer.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a prize ball connection confirmation process (step S522) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 1. In the winning ball connection confirmation process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether there is data in the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S5221). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm the value of the status register of the serial communication circuit 505. If there is no data in the reception data register (that is, if no command is received), the process proceeds to step S5227.

  If there is data in the reception data register (that is, if a command is received), the CPU 56 checks whether an error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 (step S5222). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm whether any error bit value is set in the status register of the serial communication circuit 505. If an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S5227.

  If no error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 reads the command from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505, and checks whether the received command is a connection OK command (step S5223). If it is not a connection OK command, the process proceeds to step S5227.

  If the connection OK command has been received, the CPU 56 stores the error information (see FIG. 24) set in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command in the frame state display buffer (step S5224).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value “2” indicating the prize ball transmission process 2 in the prize ball process code (step S5225), and sets a connection confirmation time 1 (for example, 1 second) in the prize ball process timer (step S5226). . Note that, based on the connection confirmation time 1 set in step S5226, control is performed to repeatedly transmit the next connection confirmation command every time one second elapses after reception of the connection OK command. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S5226 is measured in the processing of steps S52313 and S52315 described later, and one second elapses without sending a prize ball number command, and Y in step S52313. If it is determined, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52314 and S5211).

  In step S5227, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball process timer has timed out. If the winning ball process timer has timed out (that is, if the connection OK command has not been received even after 10 seconds have passed after sending the connection confirmation command), the CPU 56 sends a winning ball to the winning ball process code. A value “0” indicating the process 1 is set (step S5228), and the process ends. If the winning ball process timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball process timer (step S5229).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the prize ball transmission process 2 (step S523) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 2. In the prize ball transmission process 2, the CPU 56 checks whether or not any prize ball command output counters 1 to 5 have a count value other than 0 (step S52301). If there is no count value other than 0, the process proceeds to step S52313.

  If any of the prize ball command output counters 1 to 5 has a count value other than 0 (that is, if the count value is 1 or more), the CPU 56 loads the contents of the frame state display buffer. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the content of the frame state display buffer is 0 (step S5232). If the content of the frame state display buffer is not 0, the processing is terminated as it is. By performing such control, when the connection OK command in which the error information is set is received and the payout control microcomputer 370 is controlled to be in the payout stop state, the process does not proceed to step S52303 and subsequent steps. Then, control is made so that transmission of the prize ball number command is suspended.

  If the content of the frame state display buffer is 0 (that is, if no error relating to payout has occurred), the payout control CPU 371 determines the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command output counter whose count value is not 0. It is set in the buffer (step S52303). Specifically, in step S52301, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the count value of the prize ball command output counter 1 is zero. If the count value of the prize ball command output counter 1 is 1 or more, in step S52303, the CPU 56 sets 15 prize balls in the number buffer. In step S52301, if the count value of the prize ball command output counter 1 is 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the count values of the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 are 0 or not. If the count value of the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 is 1 or more, the CPU 56 sets the number of prize balls in the number buffer in step S52303. In step S52301, if the count values of the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 are also 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the count values of the prize ball command output counters 4 and 5 are 0 or not. . If the count value of the prize ball command output counters 4 and 5 is 1 or more, in step S52303, the CPU 56 sets the number of prize balls in the number buffer.

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command output counter whose count value is not 0 in the prize ball number command (step S52304), and uses the prize ball number command in which the number of prize balls is set for payout control. Control to transmit to the microcomputer 370 is performed (step S52305). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs processing for outputting a prize ball number command in which the number of prize balls is set to the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit 505.

  By executing the processing of steps S52301 and S52305, in this embodiment, if there is a prize ball command output counter whose count value is not 0 regardless of the connection confirmation command transmission timing (ie, If there is a prize ball number storage and a predetermined payout condition is established), a prize ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a value “3” indicating the prize ball reception confirmation process in the prize ball process code (step S52306), and sets a connection confirmation time 2 (for example, 10 seconds) in the prize ball process timer (step S52307). . It should be noted that, based on the connection confirmation time 2 set in step S52307, after transmitting the prize ball number command, it is confirmed whether a prize ball number acceptance command or a prize ball preparation command is received within 10 seconds. . Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S52307 is measured in the processing of steps S52409 and S52411 described later, and 10 seconds have elapsed without receiving a prize ball number acceptance command or a prize ball preparation command. If timed out and it is determined as Y in step S52409, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52410 and S5211).

  If the prize ball number command is transmitted in step S52305 by executing the process of step S52306, the process proceeds to the prize ball reception confirmation process without returning to the prize ball transmission process 1 including the connection confirmation command transmission process. Is done. Therefore, in this embodiment, the process of repeatedly transmitting the connection confirmation command is executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 second) until the prize ball number command is transmitted, but the prize ball number command is transmitted. In particular, the control for transmitting the connection confirmation command is stopped (more specifically, after the prize ball number command is transmitted, the process proceeds to the prize ball end confirmation process by receiving the prize ball number acceptance command described later. (See steps S52403 to S52405) or by receiving the winning ball preparation command and repeating the winning ball receipt confirmation process (see steps S52406 to S52408), without returning to the winning ball transmission process 1 In this case, the control for sending the confirmation command is stopped. Unless an abnormal state occurs in which no payout control command is returned, after the prize ball number command is transmitted, the game control microcomputer 560 is connected until the prize ball payout operation is finished and the prize ball end command is received. A confirmation command is never sent.

  Next, the CPU 56 adds the value of the number buffer set in step S52303 to the prize ball number counter (step S52308), and whether or not the added count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (eg, 501). Is confirmed (step S52309). In this embodiment, the prize ball number counter is a counter used for grasping the number of prize balls that have not been paid out on the game control microcomputer 560 side, and when the prize ball number command is transmitted, The number of prize balls designated in (1) is added, and every time ten prize balls are paid out, 10 is subtracted based on the prize ball information output from the payout control microcomputer 370. Further, as described above, the prize ball number counter is set to “250” as an initial value in the initial setting process of the main process. When the count value of the prize ball counter reaches a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (for example, 501) or more, the number of prize balls that have not been paid out is excessively large. Can be determined. Further, when the count value of the prize ball number counter is less than a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0), an abnormally large number of game balls are paid out in excess of the number to be paid out originally. Therefore, it can be determined that an excessive number of prize balls has occurred.

  In this embodiment, the prize ball number counter is added (see step S52308) immediately after the prize ball number command is transmitted (see step S52305). However, the prize ball number command is transmitted. For example, a prize ball number command may be transmitted immediately after the addition process of the prize ball number counter is executed.

  When it is determined that there is a shortage of prize balls, the signal line for outputting the prize ball information is disconnected in addition to the case where some trouble occurs on the payout control microcomputer 370 side and the payout operation cannot be performed normally. Cases are also conceivable. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of prize balls is excessive, a prize ball number command is transmitted in addition to the case where some kind of trouble occurs on the payout control microcomputer 370 side and the payout operation is performed more than necessary. It is also conceivable that some injustice is applied to the command line and the prize ball number command is illegally input to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  When the count value of the prize ball number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (for example, 501), the CPU 56 displays a prize ball error flag indicating that a prize ball shortage or a prize ball excess has occurred. It is confirmed whether it has already been set (step S52310). If the prize ball error flag has already been set, the process is terminated. If the prize ball error flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets a prize ball error flag (step S52311) and controls to send a prize ball shortage error command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S52312). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the address of the winning ball shortage error command transmission table as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the prize ball shortage error command transmission table is set to the pointer in step S52312, the effect symbol command command control process in step S30 is executed, so that the prize ball shortage error command is effect control. To the microcomputer 100 for use. Note that once the prize ball error flag is set, it is maintained without being cleared until the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on again after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In this embodiment, regarding the communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100, a command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100. Only, not the other way around.

  In this embodiment, based on the reception of a prize ball shortage error command or a prize ball excess error command described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an error notification of prize ball shortage or prize ball excess. However, the error notification of insufficient prize balls or excessive prize balls may be recovered when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of notification. Further, for example, when the value of the prize ball number counter returns to a range of a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (for example, 501) or a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0), the prize ball shortage or the prize ball is excessive. It is also possible to recover from the error notification.

  In this embodiment, the case where the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number counter at the timing at which the prize ball number command is transmitted in step S52308 is shown. For example, the number of prize balls may be subtracted instead of the one shown in the embodiment. In this case, for example, in the process of step S5311 to be described later, on the contrary, 10 may be added to the value of the winning ball counter based on the input of winning ball information. In the process of step S52309, if the value of the prize ball number counter is less than 0, it is determined that there is a prize ball shortage error. What is necessary is just to determine with an excess error.

  In step S52313, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball process timer has timed out. If the winning ball process timer has timed out (that is, if no winning ball has been stored and no new winning has occurred by the time one second has elapsed after receiving the connection OK command), the CPU 56 Then, the value “0” indicating the prize ball transmission process 1 is set in the prize ball process code (step S52314), and the process ends. If the winning ball process timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball process timer (step S52315).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a prize ball reception confirmation process (step S524) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 3. In the winning ball receipt confirmation process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not there is data in the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52401). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm the value of the status register of the serial communication circuit 505. If there is no data in the reception data register (that is, if no command is received), the process proceeds to step S52409.

  If there is data in the reception data register (that is, if a command is received), the CPU 56 checks whether or not an error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52402). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm whether any error bit value is set in the status register of the serial communication circuit 505. If an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S52409.

  If no error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 reads the command from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505, and checks whether or not the received command is a prize ball number acceptance command (step S52403). . If the winning ball number reception command has been received, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball command output counter corresponding to the winning ball number set by the transmitted winning ball number command (step S52404). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a value “4” indicating a prize ball end confirmation process in the prize ball process code (step S52405), and proceeds to step S52408.

  If the received command is not a prize ball number acceptance command, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the received command is a prize ball preparation command (step S52406). If it is not a prize ball preparation command, the process advances to step S52409.

  If the winning ball preparation command has been received, the CPU 56 stores the error information (see FIG. 24) set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball preparation command in the frame state display buffer (step S52407). Then, the CPU 56 sets the connection confirmation time 2 (for example, 10 seconds) in the prize ball process timer (step S52408). In addition, after receiving the prize ball preparation command based on the connection confirmation time 2 set in step S52408, neither the prize ball number acceptance command nor the next prize ball preparation command can be received after 10 seconds. If it is, the process returns to the control for transmitting the connection confirmation command. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S52408 is measured in the processing of steps S52409 and S52411 described later, and 10 seconds are received without receiving a prize ball number acceptance command or a next prize ball preparation command. When the time-out occurs and it is determined as Y in step S52409, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52410 and S5211).

  In step S52409, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball process timer has timed out. If the prize ball process timer has timed out (that is, if no prize ball number acceptance command or prize ball preparation command is received after 10 seconds have passed since the prize ball number command was transmitted), the CPU 56 Then, the value “0” indicating the prize ball transmission process 1 is set in the prize ball process code (step S52410), and the process ends. If the winning ball process timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball process timer (step S52411).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the winning ball end confirmation process (step S525) executed when the value of the winning ball process code is 4. In the winning ball end confirmation process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not there is data in the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52501). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm the value of the status register of the serial communication circuit 505. If there is no data in the reception data register (that is, if no command is received), the process proceeds to step S52509.

  If there is data in the reception data register (that is, if a command is received), the CPU 56 checks whether or not an error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 (step S52502). Specifically, the CPU 56 may confirm whether any error bit value is set in the status register of the serial communication circuit 505. If an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S52509.

  If no error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 reads the command from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 505, and checks whether the received command is a prize ball end command (step S52503). If the winning ball end command has been received, the CPU 56 sets a value “2” indicating the winning ball transmission process 2 in the winning ball process code (step S52504), and the connection check time 1 (for example, 1) is set in the winning ball process timer. Second) is set (step S52505). It should be noted that, based on the connection confirmation time 1 set in step S52505, the control for transmitting the connection confirmation command when the start winning prize does not occur even after one second has elapsed after receiving the prize ball end command. Return to. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S52505 is measured by the processing in steps S52313 and S52315, and one second has elapsed without sending a prize ball number command without generating a new start prize. If the time-out occurs and it is determined as Y in step S52313, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52314 and S5211).

  Since the process of step S52504 is executed, when a prize ball end command is received, the process first proceeds to prize ball transmission process 2. Therefore, when the number of prize balls is stored, the next is immediately performed. Control is performed so that a winning ball number command is transmitted. On the other hand, after the transition to the prize ball transmission process 2, there is no memorized number of prize balls, and a new prize is also generated until the connection confirmation time 1 (for example, 1 second) set in step S52505 has elapsed. If not, the process further proceeds to a prize ball transmission process 1, and the process of repeatedly transmitting the connection confirmation command is resumed.

  If the received command is not a prize ball end command, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the received command is a prize ball preparation command (step S52506). If it is not a prize ball preparation command, the process advances to step S52509.

  If the winning ball preparation command has been received, the CPU 56 stores the error information (see FIG. 24) set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball preparation command in the frame state display buffer (step S52507). Then, the CPU 56 sets the connection confirmation time 2 (for example, 10 seconds) in the prize ball process timer (step S52508). In addition, after receiving the winning ball preparation command based on the connection confirmation time 2 set in step S52508, neither the winning ball end command nor the next winning ball preparation command could be received after 10 seconds. In this case, the process returns to the control for transmitting the connection confirmation command. Specifically, the prize ball process timer set in step S52508 is measured in the processing of steps S52509 and S52511 described later, and 10 seconds have elapsed without receiving a prize ball end command or a next prize ball preparation command. If time is out and it is determined as Y in step S52509, the process returns to the prize ball transmission process 1 and the next connection confirmation command is transmitted (see steps S52510 and S5211).

  In step S52509, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball process timer has timed out. If the prize ball process timer has timed out (that is, the prize ball end command or the prize ball preparation command cannot be received even after 10 seconds have passed since the prize ball number acceptance command or prize ball preparation command is received) In this case, the CPU 56 sets a value “0” indicating the prize ball transmission process 1 in the prize ball process code (step S52510), and ends the process. If the winning ball process timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball process timer (step S52511).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the prize ball counter subtraction process in step S503. In the prize ball counter subtraction process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the prize ball information input invalid timer has timed out (step S5301). The prize ball information input invalid timer is a timer that is measured in order to provide an interval period after confirming the input of prize ball information until confirming the input of the next prize ball information. If not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the prize ball information input invalid timer (step S5302) and ends the process.

  If the prize ball information input invalid timer has timed out, the CPU 56 inputs the contents of the input port 0 (step S5303), and checks whether or not the bit of the prize ball information is on (step S5304). If the bit of the prize ball information is on, the process proceeds to step S5305.

  In step S5305, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined prize ball information confirmation count (for example, 8) as the number of processes (step S5305). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the prize ball information is input, and if the input of the prize ball information can be confirmed, the CPU 56 adds the value of the prize ball information on counter to 1 and the number of processes (8 in this example). The process is repeated until the process is completed (steps S5306 to S5308).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball information on counter is 6 or more (step S5309). If the value of the prize ball information on counter is 6 or more, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the prize ball information input invalid timer (step S5310) and sets the value of the prize ball number counter to 10 Subtraction is performed (step S5311).

  By executing the above processing, in this embodiment, it is determined that the prize ball information has been inputted on the condition that the prize ball information has been inputted 6 times or more out of the 8 confirmation processes, and 10 pieces of prize ball information are entered. The value of the prize ball number counter is decremented by 10 assuming that the prize ball has been paid out. By such processing, in this embodiment, the situation where it is determined that the prize ball information is erroneously input is reduced, and the game control microcomputer 560 side cannot properly grasp the number of prize balls that have not been paid out. It is preventing.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value after subtraction is less than a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0) (step S5312). When the count value of the prize ball number counter is less than a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball error flag is already set (step S5313). If the prize ball error flag has already been set, the process is terminated. If the prize ball error flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets the prize ball error flag (step S5314) and controls to send a prize ball excess error command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S5315). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the address of the winning ball excessive error command transmission table as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the prize ball excess error command transmission table is set in the pointer in step S5315, the effect symbol command control process in step S30 is executed, so that the prize ball excess error command is effect controlled. To the microcomputer 100 for use.

  Next, the frame state output process (step S39) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the frame state output process in step S39. In the frame state output process, the CPU 56 first loads the contents of the frame state display buffer (step S391). Next, the CPU 56 inputs the contents of the input port 1 (step S392) and logically ANDs the input contents of the input port 1 with a predetermined door opening signal confirmation mask value (specifically 01000000). (Step S393). Further, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the operation result obtained by the logical product and the contents of the frame state display buffer loaded in step S391 (step S394). By executing the above processing, a calculation result is obtained in which the door opening signal input state is further added to the contents of the frame state display buffer.

  Next, the CPU 56 compares the calculation result with the contents of the previous frame state display buffer (step S395). The previous frame state display buffer stores the calculation result of step S394 calculated when the frame state output processing is executed by the previous timer interrupt. When the calculation result is different from the content of the previous frame state display buffer (Y in step S396), the CPU 56 stores the calculation result calculated in step S394 in the previous frame state display buffer and updates the previous frame state display buffer. Along with (Step S397), the calculation result calculated in Step S394 is set as it is to the frame state display command, and control is performed to transmit the frame state display command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (Step S398). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the address of the frame state display command transmission table in the pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the frame state display command transmission table is set in the pointer in step S398, the effect symbol command control process in step S30 is executed, whereby the frame state display command is changed to the effect control micro. It is transmitted to the computer 100.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of EXT data set in the frame state display command. As shown in FIG. 38, a prize ball error (abnormal state in which a prize ball payout operation based on a winning prize or a ball lending payout operation based on a ball lending request cannot be normally performed: specifically, a main control unconnected error If a payout switch abnormality detection error 1, a payout switch abnormality detection error 2, a payout case error, or a main control communication error) is detected, “1” is given to the first ball (bit 0) winning ball error bit. Is set. When a full tank error is detected, “1” is set in the second tank (bit 1) full tank error bit. When a ball break error is detected, “1” is set to the third bit (bit 2) ball break error bit. If a payout quantity abnormality error is detected when the cumulative value of the number of prize balls or rental balls to be paid, which will be described later, reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2000), the fourth bit (bit) “1” is set in the payout number error error bit of 3). When it is detected that the glass door frame 2 is in the open state, “1” is set to the door opening abnormality error bit of the seventh bit (bit 6).

  By executing the above processing, the error information set by the connection OK command or the winning ball preparation command from the payout control microcomputer 560 (the payout number error error, the ball running out error, the full tank error, the winning ball error) And the input state of the door opening signal are set in the frame state display command and transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the first start port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13 or that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14. If the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is performed. Execute (Steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a big hit determination process and sets the display result of variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a big hit. Determine whether or not. In this case, it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probability variation state (specifically, whether or not the probability variation flag is set). Using a table, a lottery process using a jackpot determination random number (random R) is performed to determine whether or not to win. On the other hand, if the probability change state is not established, the lottery process using the big hit determination random number (random R) is performed using the normal big hit determination table shown in the left column of FIG. decide. In the case of a big hit, a big hit flag is set. In the case of a big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a big hit type determination process, and in the case of executing a variable display of the first special symbol, the big hit type determination shown in FIG. If the table (for the first special symbol) 131a is used to perform a lottery process using a random number for determining the big hit type and execute the variable display of the second special symbol, the big hit shown in FIG. Using the type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b, a lottery process using a random number for determining the jackpot type is performed to determine which of the jackpot types is to be performed. On the other hand, if not a big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a small hit determination process, and if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit determination shown in FIG. If the lottery process using the jackpot determination random number (random R) is performed using the table (for the first special symbol), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is shown in FIG. The lottery process using the big hit determination random number (random R) is performed using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), and it is determined whether or not the small hit determination is made. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process of step S36 is provided. The special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first short time flag, and a second short time flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is turned on (step S210A). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step). S211A). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S210B.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212A) and increases the value of the total reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “first” in the area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved specific area for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. The indicated data is set (step S214A).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is stored in the reserved specific area. When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set in the reserved specific area. To do. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13a is turned on in the hold specific area, and the second start port switch 14a is turned on. In this case, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. When there is no hold storage, 00 (H) is set in the hold specific area.

  In the reserved specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured, and a prize is awarded based on the winning at the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in order. Accordingly, in the reserved specific area, the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. Being formed in the RAM means an area in the RAM.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S215A). In the process of step S215A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and A random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) are extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning a prize) and stored in the storage area in advance. Instead, it may be extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process. Alternatively, the value may be directly extracted from the variation pattern determination random number counter.

  In the first reserved memory buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved memory number is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. Further, a counter for generating a software random number and a reserved storage number counter are also formed in the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 increases the number of lighting of the first special symbol reservation storage display 18a by 1 (step S219A). Moreover, control which transmits the 1st pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command is performed (step S220A).

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S30).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S210B). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step). S211B). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212B) and increases the value of the total reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213B). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S214B).

  In addition, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (step S215B). In the second reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number are secured. In the process of step S215B, the CPU 56 stores a value in a storage area corresponding to the value of the second reserved storage number counter in the second reserved storage buffer.

  Next, the CPU 56 increases the number of lighting of the second special symbol hold storage display 18b by 1 (step S219B). Further, control is performed to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S220B).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S80). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not it is decided to set the sudden probability change big hit A or the sudden probability change big hit B (step S81). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines the sudden probability variation big hit A or the sudden probability variation big hit B by confirming the value of the big hit type buffer set based on the big hit type determination result in the special symbol normal processing. It can be confirmed whether or not. If neither the sudden probability change big hit A nor the sudden probability change big hit B is found, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second time reduction flag is set (step S82). If the second time shortening flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the second time shortening jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C (see FIG. 5) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 16 (C)) is selected (step S83). If the sudden probability change big hit A or the sudden probability change big hit B is determined in step S81, or if the second time reduction flag is not set in step S82, the CPU 56 sets the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types. One of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B, 132D, and 132E (see FIGS. 16A, 16B, 16D, and 16E) is selected as a table to be used for determination (see FIGS. Step S84). Then, control goes to a step S94.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S81 to S83 is executed, when the normal big hit or the probable big hit is obtained in the second short time state, the big hit variation pattern type for the second short time The determination table 132C is selected and the fluctuation pattern of the super-shortening PB1-2 for the super-shortening fluctuation is controlled to be selected, but even in the case of sudden probability change big hit A, sudden probability change big hit B, or small hit, A variation pattern for shortening variation may be selectable.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S85). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132F (FIG. 16F) as a table used for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. )) Is selected (step S86). Then, control goes to a step S94.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first short time flag indicating that the first short time state is set (step S87). Note that the first time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the first time reduction state (including the time of transition to the probability change state), and is reset when the first time reduction state is ended. Specifically, it is usually decided to be a big hit, a probable big hit, or suddenly a probable big hit A during a high probability / low base state, set in the process of ending the big hit game, Is determined, the special symbol change display is terminated and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of stop display. If the first time reduction flag is set (Y in step S87), the CPU 56 uses the fluctuation pattern for the first time reduction as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. The type determination table 135C (see FIG. 17C) is selected (step S88). Then, control goes to a step S94.

  If the first time reduction flag is not set (N in step S87), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second time reduction flag indicating the second time reduction state is set (step S89). Note that the second time reduction flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the second time reduction state, and is reset when the second time reduction state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be sudden probability change big hit B or sudden probability change big hit A during the high probability / high base state, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and when it is determined to be big hit, The change display is reset when the stop display is stopped and the stop symbol is stopped. If the second time shortening flag is set (Y in step S89), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern for loss for the second time shortening as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. The type determination table 135D (see FIG. 17D) is selected (step S90). Then, control goes to a step S94.

  If the second time reduction flag is not set (N in Step S89), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Step S91). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S91), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 17A) is selected (step S92). Then, control goes to a step S94.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S91), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for detachment as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 17B) is selected (step S93). Then, control goes to a step S94.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processing of steps S87 to S93, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 17B is selected. The Further, when the gaming state is the first short-time state (including the case of the probability variation state), the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 17C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S94, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S96. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 19). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the first short time state (including the case where the probability variation state is included), or when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation is performed. There is. Further, when the gaming state is the second short time state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D shown in FIG. 17D is selected. In this case, ultrashort CA2-8 is determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S94 described later, and ultrashort PB1-1 of the ultrashort variation is determined as the variation pattern in the process of step S96 (see FIG. 19). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the second short time state, the change display of the super short variation is performed, and the fluctuation time is further shortened compared to the first short time state.

  In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 17C) used in the first time reduction state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages (FIG. 17). (B) is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is the first short time state or the second short time state, the total pending storage number is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). In some cases, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation or the super-shortening fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S87 or step S89, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The variation pattern type determination table 135A (see FIG. 17A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random number for determining the variation pattern type from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and selects it in the process of step S83, S84, S86, S88, S90, S92 or S93. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S94). In the case where the random number for variation pattern type determination is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 56 directly extracts the value from the random number counter for variation pattern type determination for generating the random number for variation pattern type determination. Then, the variation pattern type may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 18) as tables used for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S94. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 19) is selected (step S95). Further, the random number for variation pattern determination is read from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S95. One of them is determined (step S96). When the variation pattern determination random number is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 directly extracts and extracts the value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number. The variation pattern may be determined based on the random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S97). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S98).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S99). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S100).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 20) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S101). If not set, the process proceeds to step S109. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S102 and S103). Specifically, whether or not it is a probable big hit can be determined by checking the value of the big hit type buffer set based on the big hit type determination result in the special symbol normal processing.

  Further, when the big hit type is suddenly probable big hit A, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S104 and S105). It can be determined whether or not it is suddenly probable big hit A by checking the value of the big hit type buffer set based on the big hit type determination result in the special symbol normal processing.

  Further, when the big hit type is suddenly probable big hit B, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (steps S106 and S107). Specifically, whether or not it is suddenly probable big hit B can be determined by checking the value of the big hit type buffer set based on the big hit type determination result in the special symbol normal processing.

  When neither the probability variation big hit, the sudden probability variation big hit A, or the sudden probability variation big hit B (that is, when it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step SS108).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S101), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S109). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S110). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S109), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S111).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S112).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S130). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S131). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation storage flag for storing that the probability variation state has been controlled until the current big hit occurs (step S132). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first time reduction flag or the second time reduction flag is set (step S133). If the first time-short flag or the second time-short flag is set, the CPU 56 stores the time-short memory for storing that the first time-short state or the second time-short state is controlled until the current big hit occurs. A flag is set (step S134). Next, if it is set, the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating the probability change state, a first time reduction flag indicating the first time reduction state, and a second time reduction flag indicating the second time reduction state. Reset (step S135). If it is set, the time-count counter is also reset. If it is set, the CPU 56 resets the high-accuracy output permission flag (step S136).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S137). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is normally jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer). .

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying that the jackpot has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) in the timer before opening the big prize opening (step S138). The timer before opening the big winning opening is a timer for measuring the time until the big winning opening is released during the big hit game or the small hit game. Specifically, at the start of the big hit game, in step S138, the time required from the start of the variable display to the start of the first round (the variable display is stopped on the production control microcomputer 100 side and the jackpot symbol is displayed). The time before the first round is started until the start of the first round is set as the pre-opening timer. For the first and subsequent rounds, the interval time between the rounds (apparatus at the time of performing the interval effect between the rounds on the effect control microcomputer 100 side) is set as the timer before opening the big prize opening.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the number of times of opening in a number-of-opening counter (a counter for counting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening during the big hit game or the small hit game) (step S139). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the fixed number of times is set to 15 in the opening number counter without distinguishing the jackpot type. It should be noted that a different number of times may be set in the opening number counter according to the big hit type. For example, in the case of normal big hit or probability variation big hit, 15 times may be set in the opening number counter, and in the case of sudden probability variation big hit A or sudden probability variation big hit B, the number of open times counter may be set twice. . Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S305) (step S140).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S130, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the first time reduction state is 0 (step S130). S141). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (in this case, it is a case where the time reduction counter is set while being controlled to the first time reduction state based on the normal big hit), the CPU 56 executes the time reduction count. The counter value is decremented by -1 (step S142). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the first time reduction flag (step S144).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying that the small hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening (step S147). In the case of a small hit game, at the start of the small hit game, in step S147, the time required from the start of the variable display to the start of the small hit game is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening. . Further, during the small hit game, the interval time between each opening of the big winning opening is set in the timer before the big winning opening.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the number of times of opening in the number of times of opening counter (step S148). In this embodiment, 15 times is set in the opening number counter in step S148. When a different number of times is set according to the big hit type in step S139, for example, in the case of sudden probability change big hit A or sudden probability change big hit B, when the opening number counter is set twice, even in step S148 You may make it set 2 times to an opening frequency counter. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  44 and 45 are flowcharts showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted when it is a normal big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent when it is a probable big hit, and a small hit / abrupt is sudden when it is a sudden probable big hit. Send a probable jackpot end designation command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (step S166). Whether or not it is a normal big hit can be specifically determined by checking the value of the big hit type buffer set based on the big hit type determination result in the special symbol normal processing. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the first time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the first time reduction state (step S167). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a time reduction number counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the first time reduction state (step S168). Then, control goes to a step S179.

  If it is not a normal big hit (that is, if it is a probability variation big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of big hit is a probability variation big hit (step S169). Specifically, whether or not it is a probable big hit can be determined by checking the value of the big hit type buffer set based on the big hit type determination result in the special symbol normal processing. If it is a probable big hit, the CPU 56 sets the first time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the first time reduction state (step S170). Then, control goes to a step S178.

  If it is not the probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of big hit is suddenly the probability variation big hit A (step S171). It can be determined whether or not it is suddenly probable big hit A by checking the value of the big hit type buffer set based on the big hit type determination result in the special symbol normal processing. If the probability change big hit A suddenly, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability change storage flag is set (step S172). If the probability variation storage flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is controlled until the current big hit occurs), the CPU 56 resets the probability variation storage flag and sets the time-short storage flag. It is confirmed whether or not (step S173). If the short-time memory flag is set (that is, if it is controlled to the first short-time state or the second short-time state until the current big hit occurs), the CPU 56 resets the short-time memory flag. Then, the second time reduction flag is set to shift the gaming state to the second time reduction state (step S174). Then, control goes to a step S178. If the time saving memory flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets the first time saving flag and shifts the gaming state to the first time saving state (step S175). Then, control goes to a step S178.

  If the probability variation storage flag is not set in step S172, the process proceeds to step S178 as it is. In this case, since the first time-short flag, the second time-short flag, and the time-count counter are already reset when the fluctuation display that has become the sudden probability change big hit A in this time is finished, step S178 is executed thereafter. It is controlled only to the probability variation state (high probability state) and not to the short time state (ie, high probability / low base state). Note that when it is determined as N in step S172, the first time-short flag, the second time-short flag, and the time-count counter may be re-executed to ensure the low base state.

  In this embodiment, an example of processing is shown in which first the probability variation storage flag is checked (see step S172) and then the time-short storage flag is checked (see step S173). However, the processing order of steps S172 and S173 is as follows. The reverse is also possible. That is, when it is determined in step S171 that the sudden probability big hit A has been made, it is first confirmed whether or not the time-saving memory flag is set. If it is not set, the process may go directly to step S178. If the time-short memory flag is set, the probability variation storage flag is checked next. If the probability variation storage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S174. If the probability variation storage flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S175. You may make it transfer.

  If it is not sudden probability change big hit A in step S171 (that is, if it is sudden probability change big hit B), the CPU 56 sets the second time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the second time reduction state (step S177). . Then, control goes to a step S178.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S178). Then, control goes to a step S179.

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps S171 to S178, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit B is suddenly generated, the probability change state is controlled after the big hit game ends and the second time shortening is performed. The state is controlled (see steps S177 and S178). On the other hand, if suddenly probable big hit A has occurred, if the gaming state when sudden probable big hit A has not occurred is a probable state (if the probability is low), only the probable state after the big hit game ends (high (Probability / low base state) (see N and S178 in step S172). Further, if the game state when the sudden probability change big hit A occurs is a probability change state and a short time state (high probability / high base state), the game is controlled to a probability change state after the big hit game ends and the second time reduction The state is controlled (see steps S174 and S178). Furthermore, if the gaming state when the sudden probability change big hit A is generated is a high probability / low base state, the game is controlled to the probability changing state after the big hit game is finished and also controlled to the first time-short state (see steps S175 and S178). ).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S179).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a big hit game state, and when paying a prize ball based on a win in a big win game during a big hit game, at least a predetermined time after the big hit game is finished (In this example, 30 seconds after the final round of the jackpot game ends. 20 seconds after the end of the ending effect. Hereinafter, “End the jackpot game” indicates that the ending effect has been completed. .) The prize ball payout is completed within. Further, in this embodiment, when the big hit game including the ending effect is completed, the next fluctuation display can be started immediately, and in the first fluctuation display after the big hit game ends, the big hit can be generated immediately. . In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the fluctuation display that is a big hit includes those with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less (normal PA2-3 and normal PB2-shown in FIG. 14). 3, normal PB2-4, especially super shortened PB1-2), and when the big hit fluctuation based on the fluctuation pattern within 20 seconds is performed, after the previous big hit game is over, during the big hit game Before completing the payout control based on the winning in the big winning opening, there is a possibility that the next jackpot will occur.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, a maximum of 10 gaming balls per round can be won in the big winning game in the big hit game, and 15 prize balls are generated per winning in the big winning mouth. Therefore, if there are 10 consecutive winnings in the final round of the jackpot game (15th round) in a very short time, there will be almost no time to pay out the winning ball during the final round, and the jackpot game It may happen that 15 × 10 = 15 prize balls must be paid out from the end of the final round. In this case, if it takes 0.2 seconds for payout control per prize ball, it may take up to 30 seconds to complete payout of all prize balls after the final round of the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, when the final round of the big hit game is finished, an ending effect for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is executed, and when the ending effect is finished, the next variable display can be started immediately. In this case, in the first fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game, when the big hit fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is executed, even if 10 seconds of the ending effect is included, 30 seconds after the end of the final round The next jackpot may occur while the number is less, and after completing the previous jackpot game, before completing the payout control based on the prize winning to the jackpot during the jackpot game, Big hits can occur.

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the timer interrupt process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is surely turned on, and processing corresponding to the switch on is started. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing each 2-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the previous switch-on / off determination result (for example, 4 ms before) is stored. The port buffer is a buffer in which the contents of ports 0 and 2 input this time are stored. The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which the corresponding bit is set to 1 when switch on is detected and the corresponding bit is set to 0 when switch off is detected. The previous port buffer, port buffer, and switch-on buffer shown in FIG. 46 are prepared for each of the input ports 0 and 2. For example, in this embodiment, two switch-on buffers 1 and 2 are prepared, the switch state of the input port 0 is set to the switch-on buffer 1, and the switch state of the input port 2 is the switch-on buffer 2. Set to

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the switch processing in step S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 560 first inputs data input to the input ports 0 and 2 (see FIG. 9) (step S2101), and sets the input data in the port buffer (step S2102). ).

  Next, the initial value of the weight counter formed in the RAM 55 is set (step S2103), and the value of the weight counter is decremented by 1 (steps S2104 and S2105) until the weight counter value becomes zero.

  When the value of the wait counter reaches 0, the data of the input ports 0 and 2 are input again (step S2106), and a logical product is obtained for each bit between the input data and the data set in the port buffer. (Step S2107). Then, the operation result of the logical product is set in the port buffer (step S2108). Of the two input data input from the input ports 0 and 2 with a time interval of approximately [initial value of wait counter × (processing time of steps S2104 and S2105)], two times of the input data input by the processing of steps S2103 to S2108 Only the bits that are both “1” become “1” in the port buffer. In other words, if the ON state of the switch detection signal continues for a predetermined period [initial value of wait counter × (processing time of steps S104 and S105)], the corresponding bit in the port buffer becomes “1”.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs exclusive OR for each bit between the data previously set in the port buffer and the data set in the port buffer (step S2109). In the result of the exclusive OR operation, the bit corresponding to the switch for which the previous switch-on / off determination result (for example, 4 ms before) differs from the switch-on / off determination result determined to be on this time is “ 1 ”. The game control microcomputer 560 further performs a logical product for each bit between the result of the exclusive OR operation and the data set in the port buffer (step S2110). As a result, of the bits corresponding to the switches for which the previous switch on / off determination result and the switch on / off determination result determined to be on this time are different (according to the exclusive OR operation result), the current on Only the bit corresponding to the switch determined to be (by AND operation) remains as “1”.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the logical product calculation result in step S110 in the switch-on buffer (step S2111), and sets the contents of the port buffer in which the calculation result in step S2108 is set in the previous port buffer. (Step S2112).

  By the above processing, among the switches that have been on for a predetermined period of time, the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (for example, 4 ms ago) was off, that is, the switch changed from the off state to the on state. The bit corresponding to the switch is “1” in the switch-on buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) performs a switch normality / abnormality check process (step S2113). Further, the CPU 56 performs a prize opening abnormality check process when the door is opened (step S2114).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a switch normal / abnormal check process. In the switch normality / abnormality check process shown in FIG. 48, the CPU 56 reads the contents of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 (see FIG. 9) (step S121). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of bit 1 corresponding to the second start port switch 14a in the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 is 0 (step S122). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start port switch 14a (proximity switch) provided in the upper part of the second start winning port 14 is turned on (a game ball is detected).

  When the value of bit 1 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 is 0 (that is, when the second start port switch 14a is in the on state), the value of the switch counter formed in the RAM 55 is set. Increase by one (step S123).

  Further, the CPU 56 reads the contents of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 (see FIG. 9) (step S124). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of bit 4 corresponding to the winning confirmation switch 14b in the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 is 1 (step S125). That is, it is confirmed whether or not a winning confirmation switch 14b (photo sensor) provided at the lower part of the second start winning opening 14 is turned on (a game ball is detected).

  When the value of bit 4 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 is 1 (that is, when the winning confirmation switch 14b is on), the value of the switch counter formed in the RAM 55 is decreased by 1. (Step S126).

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the switch counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (step S127). When the value of the switch counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred, and the security signal information timer has a predetermined time (in this example, 4). Minute) is set (step S128). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) to the security signal information timer based on the fact that the value of the switch counter is 10 or more as a predetermined value. To do. In this embodiment, the abnormal output of the second start winning opening 14 is detected by executing the information output process (see S31) based on the fact that the predetermined time is set in the security signal information timer in step S128. When this is done, the security signal is externally output for a predetermined time (in this example, 4 minutes).

  In the process of step S127, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred based on, for example, the value of the switch counter being 10 or more, On the contrary, even if the value of the switch counter becomes −10 or less, it may be determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. In this case, if the switch counter value is configured so that it cannot be recognized that the value is negative, for example, 10 is set as the default value of the switch counter value. Based on the fact that the counter value becomes 0 or 20 or more, it may be determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred.

  In this embodiment, even when a value is already set in the security signal information timer and the security signal is being output to the outside, if a new abnormal winning is detected, the process of step S128 is executed again. The security signal information timer is overwritten with a predetermined time (in this example, 4 minutes). Therefore, when a new abnormal winning is detected during the external output of the security signal, the external output period of the security signal is substantially extended, and a predetermined time (in this example) from the time when the new abnormal winning is detected. 4 minutes) The output of the security signal is continued.

  In this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected by using only one switch counter is shown. However, the number of detections of the second start opening switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b are shown. Different switch counters may be used depending on the number of times detected. In this case, for example, the value of the counter for the first switch is incremented by 1 each time the on state of the second start port switch 14a is detected, and the second switch is detected every time the on state of the winning confirmation switch 14b is detected. The counter value may be incremented by one. In step S127, based on the determination that the difference between the value of the first switch counter and the value of the second switch counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 10), the process proceeds to the second start winning prize opening 14. It may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred and the process of step S128 is executed to output the security signal to the outside.

  If it is detected that an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the process of step S128 is executed to output a security signal to the outside, and a predetermined error notification command is sent to the effect control microcomputer. It is desirable that error notification can be performed by displaying a predetermined error screen on the effect display device 9 on the effect control microcomputer 100 side.

  Further, for example, in addition to the abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14, an abnormal winning at the first starting winning opening 13, an abnormal winning at the large winning opening, an abnormal magnetic error, an abnormal radio wave error, and a communication error are detected. In such a case, when the security signal is output, a different error notification command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 for each error type. Then, on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, error notification may be performed by causing the effect display device 9 to display different error screens for each type of error.

  In the above configuration, when power supply is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, an error notification is being issued before the power supply is stopped. The error notification command may be transmitted again to the effect control microcomputer 100. In other words, since the storage content such as RAM is not backed up by the backup power source on the production control microcomputer 100 side, if a power failure occurs, it is not possible to execute the production such as error notification that has been executed until then. However, the error notification can be resumed when the power failure is recovered by configuring the predetermined error notification command to be transmitted again when the power failure is recovered. The game control microcomputer 560 also backs up the value of the security signal information timer in the backup RAM. If the security signal is being output before the power supply is stopped, it is backed up when the power failure is restored. The output of the security signal may be resumed based on the value of the security signal information timer. By providing these configurations, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as turning off the error notification or stopping the output of the security signal by intentionally turning off the power to the gaming machine.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a door opening prize abnormality check process. In the door open prize abnormality check process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 56 reads the contents of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 (see FIG. 9) (step S1131). Then, it is checked whether the value of bit 0 or bit 1 corresponding to the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a in the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 is 0 (step S1132). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start port switch 14a (proximity switch) provided in the upper part of the first start port switch 13a or the second start winning port 14 is turned on (detects a game ball).

  When the value of bit 0 or bit 1 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 is 0 (that is, when the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is on), step S1135 is performed. Migrate to When the values of the bits 0 and 1 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 are both 1 (that is, when the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are in the off state), The CPU 56 reads the contents of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 (see FIG. 9) (step S1133). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of bit 0, bit 2 or bit 3 corresponding to the count switch 23 or the prize opening switches 29a and 30a in the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 is 1 (step S134). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 provided in the special winning opening and the winning opening switches 29a and 30a provided in the normal winning openings 29 and 30 are turned on (the game ball is detected).

  When the value of bit 0, bit 2 or bit 3 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to input port 0 is 1 (that is, when count switch 23 or winning port switches 29a and 30a are in the on state), step S1135 is performed. Migrate to When the values of bit 0, bit 2 and bit 3 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to input port 0 are 0 (that is, when count switch 23 and winning port switches 29a and 30 are in the off state), processing is performed Exit.

  In step S1135, the CPU 56 reads the contents of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 1 (see FIG. 9). It is checked whether or not the value of bit 6 corresponding to the door opening signal in the switch-on buffer corresponding to input port 1 is 1 (step S1136). That is, it is confirmed whether or not a door opening signal indicating that the glass door frame 2 is opened by the door opening sensor 155 is input via the dispensing control board 37.

  When the value of bit 6 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 1 is 1 (that is, when the open state of the glass door frame 2 is detected), the CPU 56 is in the open state of the glass door frame 2. Control is performed to transmit a door opening prize abnormality command indicating that an abnormal prize has been detected to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1137).

  By executing the above processing, in this embodiment, in the state in which the glass door frame 2 is in an open state, any one of the winning openings (a large winning opening, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning prize) It is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the detection of the winning of the game ball at the mouth 14, the normal winning opening 29, 30), and a door opening winning abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  50 and 51 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the switch normal / abnormal check processing. FIG. 50 shows an example of a switch normal / abnormality check process in a normal state, and FIG. 51 shows an example of a switch normal / abnormality check process when an illegal act leading to an abnormal winning is performed. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a (proximity switch) corresponding to bit 1 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to input port 2 (see FIG. 9). When it is done, it becomes “0”. Further, bit 4 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 (see FIG. 9) becomes “1” when a game ball is detected by the winning confirmation switch 14b (photo sensor) corresponding to the bit 1. If the switch is operating normally and has not received any fraudulent activity (an act of illegally turning on the detection signal from the switch or illegally turning on the detection signal in the on state), Since the start port switch 14a is arranged upstream of the winning confirmation switch 14b, first, the second starting port switch 14a (proximity switch) is turned on, and then the winning confirmation switch 14b (photo sensor) is turned on. It should be. Therefore, based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the value of the switch counter is incremented by 1 to 1 (see step S123 in FIG. 48), and then the winning confirmation switch 14b is turned on. The value of the switch counter is decremented by 1 and returned to 0 (see step S125 in FIG. 48). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the switch, bit 1 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 becomes “0”, bit 4 of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 becomes “1”, In the normal operation state, although there is a deviation in the count-up timing (corresponding to a deviation in the passing timing of the game ball), as shown in FIG. 50, the value of the switch counter should be kept at 0. .

  However, when a fraudulent act by radio waves is performed, as shown in FIG. 51, the off-state is illegally interrupted by radio waves during the period when the second start switch 14a should be turned on once, as if the second There is a possibility that an illegal act of recognizing the starter switch 14a as if it has been turned on twice is performed. Therefore, although the second start port switch 14a is turned on only once, it is misrecognized that the second start port switch 14a is turned on twice, and the value of the switch counter is 2 in total. Addition becomes 2 (step S123 in FIG. 48 is executed twice). On the other hand, the winning confirmation switch 14b arranged on the downstream side is different in detection method from the electromagnetic second starter switch 14a, and uses an optical photosensor. Not affected. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51, when one game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, when the game ball is detected on the side of the winning confirmation switch 14b after a short delay, the winning confirmation switch 14b is normally operated. On is detected only once, and the value of the switch counter is decremented by 1 to 1 (see step S125 in FIG. 48). Therefore, when a fraudulent act by radio waves is performed, a difference occurs in the number of detections between the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b having different detection methods, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the value of the switch counter is not kept at 0 and the value of the switch counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (10 in this example) (between the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b) Based on the fact that the accumulated value of the detection errors has become a predetermined value (10 in this example) or more, it is possible to detect that an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has occurred.

  In addition, it is also conceivable that a similar illegal act is performed by an act of illegally irradiating light. In this case, during the period when the winning confirmation switch 14b is supposed to be turned on once, there is a possibility that a fraudulent action may be performed that causes the off state to be illegally interrupted by light and recognized as if the winning confirmation switch 14b has been turned on twice. is there. However, in this case, on the contrary, on the electromagnetic second starter switch 14a side, the game ball can be normally detected without being affected by the illegal act of light, so that the value of the switch counter is kept at 0 similarly. The cumulative value of the detection error between the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b is a predetermined value (this In the example, on the basis of 10) or more, it is possible to detect that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred.

  In this embodiment, the output of the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b is negative logic, but the output of the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b is positive logic. You may comprise so that it may become. In this case, for example, the output levels of the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b are logically inverted by the input driver circuit and then input to the game control microcomputer 560.

  In this embodiment, the value of the switch counter is not maintained at 0 (a detection error has occurred between the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b), and an abnormal winning is immediately achieved. It is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the fact that the value of the switch counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (10 in this example). With such a configuration, for example, a case where a game ball is in a clogged state in the second start winning opening 14 is prevented from being determined as an abnormal prize due to fraud.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where a game ball is in a clogged state in the second start winning opening 14. As shown in FIG. 52, in the second start winning opening 14, the second start opening switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b are arranged at a certain distance in the vertical direction. Therefore, the game ball won in the second start winning opening 14 is first detected by the second start opening switch 14a, and then detected by the downstream winning check switch 14b after a short time. As shown in FIG. 52, when a game ball is clogged in the second start winning opening 14, it is detected by the physical distance difference between the second start opening switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b. A difference occurs in the number. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that a maximum of three detection errors occur between the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b. Therefore, in this embodiment, the value of the switch counter is a predetermined value (in this example, a sufficient margin is provided for the three detection errors between the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b in the ball clogging state). 10) By determining that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the above, a case where a game ball has become clogged in the second start winning opening 14 is determined as an abnormal winning due to an illegal act. Is preventing.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined value (10 in this example) is sufficient with a sufficient margin for the three detection errors of the second start opening switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b in the ball jammed state. Although the case where it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the above is shown, the predetermined value used for determining the abnormal winning is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, if the number of detection errors between the second start opening switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b in the ball jammed state is more than three, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of abnormal winning. It may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the fact that the counter value becomes 4 or more.

  In addition, when it is configured to be able to detect abnormal winnings at a plurality of winning mouths, an abnormal winning determination is made using a number greater than the total number of detection errors in the ball jammed state at all of the winning mouths as a predetermined value. You may make it perform. For example, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with two start winning ports, when it is configured to detect an abnormal winning of a large winning port in addition to two starting winning ports, detection in a ball clogged state at each winning port Assuming that there are 3 errors each, a maximum of 3 x 3 = 9 detection errors may occur due to clogging of the ball at the prize opening even if it is not based on fraudulent acts using radio waves. . Therefore, in such a case, if it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the switch counter being at least 10 or more, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of an abnormal winning.

  FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing various signals output to the terminal board 160. As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is connected to the terminal board 160 with a symbol determination number of times 1 signal, a start-up signal, a jackpot signal, a jackpot. Two signals, three jackpot signals, a time reduction signal, a winning signal, a security signal, and a high probability signal are output by the information output process (see step S31) on the game control microcomputer 560 side. In this embodiment, the prize ball information is sent from the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 to the terminal board 160 via the main board 31. It is output by the information output process on the 370 side (see step S759).

  The symbol determination number 1 signal is a signal for notifying the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The starting port signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14. The jackpot 1 signal is a signal for notifying that the jackpot game (during the operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus) is in progress. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal for notifying that the jackpot game (during the operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus) or that the special symbol variation time shortening function is in operation (during the short-time state). The jackpot 3 signal is a signal for notifying that a 15-round jackpot game is in progress. The time reduction signal is a signal for notifying that the special symbol variation time reduction function is operating (in the time reduction state).

  In addition, as described above, the winning signal indicates that a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 balls) of winning balls is satisfied (the first start winning port 13, This is a signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the second start winning port 14, the big winning port, and the normal winning ports 29, 30. The award ball has not been paid out.

  The security signal is a signal indicating the security state of the gaming machine. Specifically, when it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred based on the detection result of the second starting opening switch 14a and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b, the security signal is It is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 4 minutes). Also, when the gaming machine is turned on and the initialization process is executed, a security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

  It should be noted that the signal output externally as the security signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, not only abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14, but abnormal winning at the first starting winning opening 13, the large winning opening, or the normal winning openings 29, 30 can be detected and output as a security signal to the outside. You may comprise as follows. In addition, for example, when abnormal magnetism is detected by a magnet sensor provided in a gaming machine or when abnormal radio waves are detected by a radio wave sensor provided in a gaming machine, it is configured so that it can be output externally as a security signal. Also good. In addition, for example, when an abnormality of various switches provided in a gaming machine is detected (for example, when an occurrence of a short circuit is detected by determining that an input value exceeds a threshold value), it can be externally output as a security signal. You may comprise as follows. In this way, even if an abnormal winning at the big prize opening, abnormal magnetic error, or abnormal radio wave error is configured to be output as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160, even one signal line can be connected. In this case, error detection can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer, and the work load related to error detection can be reduced.

  Further, for example, even when a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected, it can be externally output as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. May be. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a communication error has occurred based on failure to receive a connection OK command or a prize ball number reception command (to be described later) from the payout control microcomputer 370, and the terminal The security signal may be externally output from the common connector CN8 of the board 160. Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a communication error has occurred based on the value of any error bit in the status register of the serial communication circuit 505 being set, and the terminal board 160 has The connector CN8 may be externally output as a security signal.

  In addition to the signal line and connector CN8 for security signals, a signal line and connector dedicated to communication errors between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 may be provided on the terminal board 160. When a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected, an external device such as a hall computer is transmitted via the terminal board 160 as a signal different from the security signal. May be output.

  The high probability signal is a signal indicating that the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state (probability change state). In this embodiment, the high-accuracy signal is externally output through the terminal board 160 until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power failure is restored (specifically, until the first big hit occurs).

  Further, as described above, the prize ball information is a signal that is output every time a specific number (10 in this example) of prize ball payouts is detected. In this embodiment, a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (10 balls in this embodiment) is satisfied (first start winning opening 13, second start winning prize). The winning signal is output to the outside based on the fact that the winning to the mouth 14, the big winning opening, the normal winning openings 29, 30 has occurred), and the number of winning balls can be grasped on the hall side based on the winning signal. Therefore, the prize ball information may be configured not to be output externally.

  54 to 57 are flowcharts showing the information output process in step S31. Of the processes shown in FIGS. 54 to 57, steps S1002 to S1020 are processes for outputting a start port signal, steps S1021 to S1023 are processes for outputting a winning signal, and steps S1031 to S1036. Is a process for outputting one signal for the number of symbol determinations, and steps S1050 to S1068 are processes for outputting one signal for big hit, two signals for big hit, three signals for big hit, and a short time signal. Steps S1069 to S1074 are processes for outputting a security signal, and steps S1075 to S1077 are processes for outputting a high-accuracy signal.

  In the information output process, the CPU 56 first sets the address of the start port information setting table in the pointer (step S1002) and loads the number of processes pointed to by the pointer (step S1003). The start port information setting table includes the number of processes (= 2), two start port switch input bits (first start port switch input bit determination value (01 (H))) and second start port switch input bit determination value ( 02 (H))) is set. The first start port switch input bit determination value is a determination value for determining whether or not there is a start winning in the first start winning port 13, and the second start port switch input bit determination value is a second value. This is a determination value for determining whether or not there is a start winning in the start winning opening 14. In step S1003, since the pointer points to the address of the number of processes in the start port information setting table, the data of the number of processes (= 2) in the start port information setting table is loaded.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S1004), and sets the switch-on buffer as switch input data (step S1005). The pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1006), the start port switch input bit pointed to by the pointer is loaded into the register (step S1007), and the logical product of the start port switch input bit and the switch input data is obtained (step S1008). In this case, when the number of processes is 1, the first start port switch input bit is loaded and the logical product of the switch input data is obtained. When the number of processes is 2, the second start port switch input is obtained. The bit is loaded and the logical product of the switch input data is taken. When the number of processes is 1 and the first start port switch 13a is on, the logical product operation result is 01 (H). When the number of processes is 2 and the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 02 (H). When the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are not turned on, the logical product operation result is 00 (H).

  If the logical operation result is 0 (Y in step S1009), the process proceeds to step S1015. If the logical product operation result is not 0 (N in step S1009), it is determined that the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 has been won, and the start opening information storage counter is loaded into the register. (Step S1010). The start port information storage counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining outputs of the start port signal (that is, the remaining number of start winnings that have not been output from the start port signal). Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the start port information storage counter (step S1011). Then, it is confirmed whether the calculation result (added result) is not 0 (step S1012). When the calculation result is 0 (N in step S1012), 1 is subtracted from the calculation result (step S1013). Then, the calculation result is stored in the start port information storage counter (step S1014).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the number of processes (step S1015), and determines whether the number of processes is not 0 (step S1016). When the number of processes is not 0 (Y in step S1016), the process proceeds to step S1004. In this embodiment, since the gaming machine includes the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, 2 is set as the initial value of the number of processes, and the processing of steps S1004 to S1016 is 2. Will be executed once.

  If it is determined in step S1016 that the number of processes is 0 (N in step S1016), the CPU 56 sets an initial value (00 (H)) in the information buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1017). Next, the CPU 56 sets the start port output bit position (bit 1 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 8) of the information output buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1018). Then, the CPU 56 sets the address of the start port information storage timer in the pointer (step S1019), and executes a winning timer setting process (step S1020).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the winning output bit position of the information output buffer (bit 6 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 8) (step S1021). Then, the CPU 56 sets the address of the winning information storage timer in the pointer (step S1022), and executes a winning timer setting process (step S1023).

  In this embodiment, a common subroutine (winning timer set process) is executed when the start signal is output externally and when the winning signal is output externally, so that the start port output bit position of the information buffer is output. Is set and a start port signal is output, a winning output bit position of the information buffer is set, and a winning signal is output. Details of the winning timer setting process will be described later (see FIG. 58).

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol determination number 1 information timer into the register (step S1031), reflects the state of the symbol determination number 1 information timer in the flag register (step S1032), and the symbol determination number 1 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not (step S1033). In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation processing (see step S303), when the variation time is timed out, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination number 1 information timer outputs the symbol determination number output time (in this example, 0.500 seconds) is set, and when the symbol determination count output time has not elapsed, it is determined that the symbol determination count 1 information timer has not timed out, and when the symbol determination count output time has elapsed (symbol determination count) When the value 1 information timer value is 0), it is determined that the symbol determination time 1 information timer has timed out.

  If the symbol determination count 1 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1033), the symbol determination count 1 information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1034), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol determination count 1 information timer (step S1035). . Then, the design buffer count 1 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 0 of output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 8) is set (step S1036). When the symbol determination number 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. Is output from the output port 1 (becomes ON state). If the symbol determination number 1 information timer times out (Y in step S1033), the process of step S1036 is not executed, and as a result, the symbol determination number 1 signal is turned off.

  Each time the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped (the stopped symbol is fixed) by the processing of steps S1031 to S1036 described above, the symbol determination number 1 signal is output as the symbol determination number output time (for example, 500 ms). Turns on.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1050), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the special winning opening opening pre-processing designation value (“5”) (step S1051), and the special symbol process flag. It is determined whether the value of is less than 5 (step S1052). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1052), the process proceeds to step S1058. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1052), the value of the special symbol process flag is compared with the small hit release pre-processing specified value (“8”) (step S1053), and the special symbol is processed. It is determined whether or not the value of the process flag is 8 or more (step S1054). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 8 or more (Y in step S1054), the process proceeds to step S1058. When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 8 (N in Step S1054), the output buffer position of one big hit in the information buffer is set (Step S1055). Further, the big output 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1056). When one output bit position of jackpot and two output bit positions of jackpot of the information buffer are set, the information buffer is set to an output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. One signal and two jackpot signals are output from the output port 1 (become turned on).

  In this embodiment, a case where control is performed so that one signal of big hit is not externally output in the case of a small hit by the processing of step S1054 is shown. However, a common effect described later as in this embodiment is shown. In the gaming machine configured to be executable, even if it is a small hit, the process may shift to the process of step S1055 so that one signal for a big hit can be output externally. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, if it is a sudden probability variation big hit A that is in a high probability / low base state, the processing of step S1055 is not executed, but the process proceeds to step S1058 as it is, and one signal of big hit May be configured not to be output externally. If comprised in that way, during a common production | presentation, it can be made to be unable to recognize whether it is a high probability state (probability change state) by one jackpot signal.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a time reduction check process for confirming whether or not the first time reduction state or the second time reduction state (step S1058), and determines whether or not the first time reduction state or the second time reduction state. (Step S1059). Specifically, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first time reduction flag set when shifting to the first time reduction state or the second time reduction flag set when shifting to the second time reduction state is set. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is in the first short time state or the second short time state. When it is in the first short time state or the second short time state (Y in step S1059), the short time output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1060). When the time-short output bit position is set, the time buffer signal is output from the output port 1 by setting the information buffer to the output value in the subsequent step S1102 and outputting the output value to the output port 1 in step S1103. (Turns on) Also, the big output 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1061). When the jackpot 2 output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103, whereby the jackpot 2 signal is output from the output port 1. (Turns on).

  Further, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1062), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the special winning opening opening pre-processing designation value (“5”) (step S1063), and sets the special symbol process flag. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 5 (step S1064). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1064), the process proceeds to step S1069. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1064), the value of the special symbol process flag is compared with the small hit release pre-processing designation value (“8”) (step S1065). It is determined whether or not the value of the process flag is 8 or more (step S1066). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 8 or more (Y in step S1066), the process proceeds to step S1069. When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 8 (N in step S1066), the special symbol normal processing loads the contents of the big hit type buffer set based on the big hit type determination result, and the normal big hit or the probable big hit It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S1067). Whether or not a normal big hit or a probable big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the contents of the big hit type buffer set in the special symbol normal process. For example, the jackpot type buffer stores the contents of the jackpot type determined by the special symbol normal processing and the contents indicating the jackpot determination result. For example, “01” is a normal jackpot, “02” is a probable big hit, “ “03” is suddenly assumed to be a big hit A, and “04” is suddenly a big odd B. If the contents of the big hit type buffer are “01” or “02”, it is determined that the big hit is a normal big hit or a probable big hit. In this case, the big output 3 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1068). When the jackpot 3 output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103, so that the jackpot 3 signal is output from the output port 1. (Turns on).

  By the processing of steps S1050 to S1068 described above, one big hit signal, two big hit signals, three big hit signals, and a short time signal are output (turned on) according to the type of big hit and the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the security signal information timer (step S1069), reflects the state of the security signal information timer in the flag register (step S1070), and determines whether the security signal information timer has timed out (step S1070). S1071). In this embodiment, it is determined that the detection difference between the second starting port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b has reached a predetermined value (10 in this example) or more, and it is determined that an abnormal winning is generated at the starting winning port. If the predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) is set in the security signal information timer (see steps S127 and S128 in the switch normality / abnormality check process), and the predetermined time has not elapsed, When it is determined that the signal information timer has not timed out and the predetermined time has elapsed (when the value of the security signal information timer is 0), it is determined that the security signal information timer has timed out.

  In this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization process is executed, a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) is set in the security signal information timer (in the main process). When the predetermined time has not elapsed, it is determined that the security signal information timer has not timed out, and when the predetermined time has elapsed (when the value of the security signal information timer is 0), It is determined that the security signal information timer has timed out.

  If the security signal information timer has not timed out (N in step S1071), the security signal information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1072), and the calculation result is stored in the security signal information timer (step S1073). Then, the security signal output bit position of the information buffer (bit 7 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 8) is set (step S1074). When the security signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the security signal is output from the output port 1 by setting the information buffer to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and outputting the output value to the output port 1 in the step S1103. Is output (turns on). If the security signal information timer times out (Y in step S1071), the security signal is turned off as a result of the processing in step S1074 not being executed.

  By the processing of steps S1069 to S1074 shown above, initialization processing is executed until 4 minutes have elapsed after the abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 is detected, or at the start of power supply to the gaming machine. Until 30 seconds elapse, a security signal is output using the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. If a new abnormal prize is detected during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is continued until 4 minutes have elapsed since the last abnormal prize was detected.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high-accuracy output permission flag is set (step S1075). Note that the high-accuracy output permission flag is set when the hot start process is executed at the start of power supply to the gaming machine (see step S9103). If the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S1076). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the high-accuracy medium signal output bit position (bit 7 of the output port 0 in the example shown in FIG. 8) of the information buffer (step S1077). When the high-accuracy signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 0 in step S1103. Output from output port 0 (becomes ON state). In this embodiment, after the power failure recovery, if the first big hit occurs, the high-accuracy output permission flag is reset (see step S136), and as a result, the high-accuracy medium signal is turned off.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the high-accuracy output permission flag is reset when the first big hit occurs. It is not limited to what is shown. For example, the high-accuracy medium output permission flag may be reset even when a small hit occurs. In addition, for example, when it is configured to end the certain variation state based on the fact that the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times after being controlled to the certain variation state, the certain number of variation display is terminated and the certain variation state is displayed. The configuration may be such that the high-accuracy output permission flag is reset when the process ends.

  If the probability variation flag is set after the power failure is restored by the processing of steps S1075 to S1077 described above, the high-probability medium signal is maintained until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, until the first big hit occurs). Is output (turns on). That is, in this embodiment, as already described, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the probability variation flag is held in the backup RAM for a predetermined period. For this reason, if the probability change state was controlled before the occurrence of a power failure, the probability change flag should be held in the backup RAM. Until then, the output of the high-accuracy signal is continued.

  In this embodiment, when the first big hit occurs, the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is reset (see step S136), so that the high-accuracy medium signal is not output thereafter. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, if the first big hit occurs), the output of the high-accuracy signal is prohibited.

  In this embodiment, only the process of setting the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is performed at the time of executing the power failure recovery process of the main process, and it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag is set in the information output process of step S31. However, the processing method for outputting the high-accuracy signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag is set in the power failure recovery processing of the main processing, and if it is set, the high accuracy signal output bit position of the information buffer is set or A high accuracy signal may be output by performing processing such as setting a timer. Even when the probability variation flag is checked in the power failure recovery process and the output of the high-accuracy signal is started in this way, the high-level signal is output when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the first big hit occurs. It may be configured to perform control so as to stop the output of the accuracy signal, and to control so as not to output the accuracy signal thereafter.

  In this embodiment, the output bit position of the corresponding signal in the information output processing shown in FIGS. 54 to 57 is set for each timer interrupt (steps S1036, S1055, S1056, S1060, S1061, S1068, S1074). , S1077), and steps S1102 and S1103 are executed to externally output from the output ports 0 and 1, but the output bit value corresponding to the output state of each signal changes from the previous setting. It doesn't change unless it is done. For example, if the value of the corresponding output bit is set to “1”, the signal continues to be output while it is set.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the winning timer setting process executed in steps S1020 and S1023 of the information output process. In the winning timer setting process, the CPU 56 first loads the information storage timer pointed to by the pointer (step S2001), reflects the state of the loaded information storage timer in the flag register (step S2002), and a signal is being output. Is determined (step S2003). In this case, when the winning timer set process is executed in step S1020 of the information output process, the start port information storage timer is loaded and the state is reflected in the flag register, and whether or not the start port signal is being output. It will be determined. When the winning timer setting process is executed in step S1023 of the information output process, the winning information storage timer is loaded and the state is reflected in the flag register to determine whether or not the winning signal is being output. Will do.

  The start port information storage timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (for example, an on time of 100 ms and an off time of 100 ms) of the start port signal. If the value of the start port information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the start port signal is being output, and if the value of the start port information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the start port signal is not being output. The winning information storage timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (for example, an on time of 100 ms and an off time of 100 ms) of the winning signal. If the value of the winning information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the winning signal is being output. If the value of the winning information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the winning signal is not being output.

  If the signal (start port signal or winning signal) is being output (Y in step S2003), the process proceeds to step S2012. If the signal (start port signal or winning signal) is not being output (N in step S2003), the CPU 56 adds 1 to the pointer value (step S2004). In this embodiment, in the ROM 54, the start port information storage counter is set in the area next to the area where the start port information storage timer is set, and the area next to the area where the winning information storage timer is set. Is set with a winning information storage counter. Therefore, by executing the process of step S2004, the pointer value indicates the address of the start port information storage counter or the winning information storage counter.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the information storage counter (starting port information storage counter or winning information storage counter) pointed to by the pointer (step S2005), and the state of the loaded information storage counter (starting port information storage counter or winning information storage counter) Is reflected in the flag register (step S2006), and it is determined whether there is a remaining number of output times of the signal (start port signal or winning signal) (step S2007).

  When the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on (N in step S1009), the start port information storage counter is incremented (the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a). 1 is added if either one is on, and 2 is added if both are on. (See step S1011.) Therefore, it is determined that there is a remaining number of output times of the start port signal. Become. In addition, when a winning is made to any of the winning openings (the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the large winning opening, the normal winning openings 29, 30), the number of planned winning balls is ten. Each time it accumulates, the winning information storage counter is incremented (see step S5122), so it is determined that there is a remaining number of winning signal outputs.

  If there is no remaining number of outputs of the signal (start port signal or winning signal) (Y in step S2007), the winning timer setting process is terminated. If there is a remaining number of output times of the signal (start port signal or winning signal) (N in step S2007), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the upper storage counter (start port information storing counter or winning information storing counter) pointed to by the pointer. (Step S2008) The calculation result (the result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the information storage counter (start port information storage counter or winning information storage counter) (Step S2009). Then, the winning information operating time (50) is set in the register (step S2010). The winning information operating time (50) is a time for which a 4 ms timer interrupt is executed 50 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms). In this embodiment, the case where the same value is set as the winning information operating time is shown when the start opening signal is output and when the winning signal is output. However, different values are set. Also good.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the pointer (step S2011). By executing the processing in step S2011, the pointer value returns to the state indicating the address of the start port information storage timer or the winning information storage timer again. Then, the process proceeds to step S2012.

  Next, if the winning information operating time is not set in step S2010, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the information storage timer (start port information storing timer or winning information storing timer) pointed to by the pointer, and the winning information operating time is determined in step S2010. If it is set, 1 is subtracted from the winning information operating time (step S2012). Then, the calculation result (the result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the information storage timer (start port information storage timer or winning information storage timer) pointed to by the pointer (step S2013).

  The CPU 56 compares the calculation result with the winning information on time (25) (step S2014), and determines whether the calculating result is shorter than the winning information on time (step S2015). The winning information on time (25) is a time for which a 4 ms timer interruption is executed 25 times, that is, a time of 0.100 seconds (100 ms).

  When the calculation result is not shorter than the winning information on time, that is, when the calculating result (remaining time of the starting information storing timer or the winning information storing timer) is longer than the winning information on time (100 ms) ( In step S2015 N), the CPU 56 loads the information buffer (step S2016), and obtains a logical sum of the loaded information buffer value and the information output buffer value (step S2017). Then, the CPU 56 stores the calculation result of step S2017 in the information buffer (step S2018).

  If the winning timer set process is executed in step S1020 of the information output process by executing the processes of steps S2016 to S2018, the value of the information output buffer in which the start port output bit is set in step S1018 Is obtained, the start port output bit position of the information buffer (bit 1 of output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 8) is set. When the start port output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in step S1102 of the subsequent information output process, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. The mouth signal is output from the output port 1.

  Further, when the winning timer set process is executed in step S1023 of the information output process by executing the processes of steps S2016 to S2018, the value of the information output buffer in which the winning output bit is set in step S1011 Is obtained, the winning output bit position of the information buffer (bit 6 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 8) is set. Then, when the winning output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in step S1102 of the subsequent information output processing, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. Is output from the output port 1.

  Through the information output processing steps S1002 to S1020 and the winning timer setting process shown in FIG. When the 2 start port switch 14a is turned on), a start port signal is output. That is, after the start port signal is turned on for 100 ms, it is turned off for 100 ms. By inputting this start port signal to the hall computer, it is possible to recognize the number of winnings to the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14.

  Since the start port signal is turned on for 100 ms and then turned off for 100 ms, the next start port is turned on after the 100 ms off state even if a start winning is continuously generated in a short time. A signal is output. That is, the start port signals are output with an interval of at least 100 ms.

  Thus, since the start port signals are output at intervals of at least 100 ms, the hall computer can reliably grasp the total number of start winning prizes.

  Further, any of the winning ports (first starting winning port 13, second starting winning port 14, large winning port, ordinary winning port 29, etc.) is performed by the information output processing steps S1021 to S1023 and the winning timer setting process shown in FIG. A winning signal is output every time the winning number 30) is won and the planned number of winning balls is accumulated. That is, after the winning signal is turned on for 100 ms, it is turned off for 100 ms. By inputting this winning signal to the hall computer, the expected number of winning balls can be recognized.

  Since the winning signal is turned on for 100 ms and then turned off for 100 ms, even if a start winning is continuously generated in a short time, the next winning signal is displayed after the off state for 100 ms. Is output. In other words, the winning signals are output with an interval of at least 100 ms.

  Thus, the winning signals are output at intervals of at least 100 ms, so that the hall computer can reliably grasp the total number of planned winning balls.

  In this embodiment, when the winning signal is output to the outside, first, the processing of step S2012 is executed to subtract the value of the winning information storage timer, and then the winning signals are executed by executing steps S2018, S1102, and S1103. However, the processing order of the subtraction processing of the winning information storage timer and the external output processing of the winning signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, first, the same processing as in steps S2018, S1102, and S1103 is executed to execute the external output processing of the winning signal, and then the same processing as in step S2012 is performed to subtract the value of the winning information storage timer. Also good.

  Next, the output timing of the high-accuracy signal will be described. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the output timing of the high-accuracy signal. In this embodiment, when the hot start process is executed at the start of power supply to the gaming machine (see step S91), the information output is based on the fact that the high-accuracy output permission flag is set (see step S9103). In the process (refer to step S31), the processes of steps S1075 to S1103 are executed, and as shown in FIG. Is done.

  Thereafter, the game control process can be executed, and when a game is performed by the player, as shown in FIG. 59, the variable display is executed in accordance with the start winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port Is done. In this case, even if the fluctuation display is executed, if the fluctuation display result is “out of range”, the information output process (see step S31) is performed in step S1075 based on the fact that the high-accuracy output permission flag is maintained. Through the process of S1103, the output of the high-accuracy signal is continued.

  When the first big hit occurs as a result of the variable display, the high-accuracy output permission flag is reset at the end of the variable display (see step S136). Thereafter, when it is determined as N in step S1075 of the information output process (see step S31), the processes of steps S1076 and S1077 are not executed, and the output of the high-accuracy signal is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Next, the security signal output timing will be described. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing security signal output timing. In this embodiment, when initialization processing is executed at the start of power supply to the gaming machine (see steps S10 to S14), a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) is set in the security signal information timer. Based on the above (see step S14a), the processing of steps S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103 is executed in the information output process (see step S31), and as shown in FIG. 60 (A), from the connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. A security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. Further, after the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the detection error between the detection number of the start port switch 14a and the detection number of the winning confirmation switch 14b becomes a predetermined value (10 in this example) or more. Even when it is determined that an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has occurred (see steps S121 to S127), a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) is set in the security signal information timer. Based on the above (see step S128), the information output process (see step S31) executes the processes of steps S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103, and from the connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 as shown in FIG. A security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. As described above, in this embodiment, the common terminal board 160 is used when the initialization process is executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started and when the abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 is detected. A security signal is externally output from the connector CN8.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the security signal is being output to the outside, when an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is newly detected, the security signal output period is substantially extended, Finally, the output of the security signal is continued until a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) has elapsed since the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 was detected. For example, in the case where the output of the security signal is started based on the fact that the initialization process is executed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), until 30 seconds elapse. The output of the security signal should continue. However, as shown in FIG. 60B, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the detection error between the number of detections of the second start port switch 14a and the number of detections of the winning confirmation switch 14b is a predetermined value (this In the example, there is a possibility that it becomes 10) or more and it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. In this case, a predetermined time (in this example, 4 minutes) is overwritten and written in the security signal information timer based on the detection of the occurrence of the abnormal winning (see step S128), and the information output process (step S31). In step S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103, the security signal is output as it is as shown in FIG. However, since the value of the security signal information timer has been overwritten to 4 minutes, in this case, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), 4 minutes have elapsed since the abnormal winning to the start winning opening 14 was detected. Until then, the output of the security signal is continued, and the output of the security signal is substantially extended.

  For example, when the output of the security signal is started based on the detection of the abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), until 4 minutes elapse in principle. The output of the security signal should continue. However, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), even before the lapse of 4 minutes, the detection error between the number of detections of the second start port switch 14a and the number of detections of the winning confirmation switch 14b is a predetermined value (this In the example, there is a possibility that it becomes 10) or more and it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has newly occurred. In this case, a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) is overwritten and written in the security signal information timer based on the newly detected occurrence of an abnormal winning (see step S128), and information output processing ( In step S31), the processing of steps S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103 is executed, and the output of the security signal is continued as shown in FIG. 60C. However, since the value of the security signal information timer is overwritten in 4 minutes, in this case, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), from the time when the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is newly detected. The output of the security signal is continued until 4 minutes have elapsed, and the output of the security signal is substantially extended.

  If an abnormal winning to the second start winning port 14 is detected while the security signal is already being output, the output of the security signal being output is terminated and the next security signal is output again. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60B and 60C, the security signal is output by extending the output time of the security signal being output as it is. The processing load on the output processing of the security signal is reduced, and the program capacity for the output processing of the security signal is reduced. In other words, when it is configured to start the output of the next security signal after the output of the security signal being output is completed, the output of the next security signal is started after the output of the security signal is completed. For example, a process for measuring the interval time until completion is required, which increases the processing load and the program capacity. In contrast, in this embodiment, since the value of the security signal information timer is overwritten as it is, if only the process of setting the value of the security signal information timer is performed (see steps S14a and S128), the security signal is output. It is possible to prevent the increase in processing load and program capacity.

  In this embodiment, when the initialization process is executed at the start of power supply to the gaming machine, a security signal is output for 30 seconds, and an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 is detected. In this case, the case where the security signal is output for 4 minutes is shown, but the output time of the security signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. In other words, it is possible to recognize whether the initialization process has been executed or the case where an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has been detected. What is necessary is just to output a security signal over an output time different from when an abnormal winning is detected.

  In this embodiment, the security signal output period when an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected is set to 4 minutes in the case of an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14. In order to output a security signal for as long a time as possible, it is set to a substantially maximum time that can be set. That is, in this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 can set a 2-byte value as the value of the security signal information timer, the maximum value is set to “FFFF (H) = 65535 in the security signal information timer. "Can be set. Therefore, in this embodiment, “60000”, which is almost the maximum value, is set in the security signal information timer, and the timer interruption period is 4 ms. Therefore, security is performed for 4 ms × 60000 = 4 minutes. A signal is output.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means (the payout control microcomputer 370) will be described. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the payout control means. As shown in FIG. 61, the output port 0 outputs a signal of each phase supplied to the payout motor 289 by the stepping motor. In addition, a PRDY signal or an EXS signal is output from the output port 0 to the card unit 50, and a game indicating that the gaming machine is in an error state (in this example, a ball-out error state or a full tank error state). A machine error state signal and a prize ball signal 1 indicating that a prize ball payout has been detected are also output. Further, from the output port 1, each segment output signal of the error display LED 374 by 7 segment LED is output. The output port 1 also outputs prize ball information indicating that ten prize ball payouts have been detected.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the payout control means. As shown in FIG. 62, the VL signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal from the card unit 50 are input to bits 0 to 2 of the input port 0, respectively. A connection signal from the main board 31 is input to bit 4 of the input port 0. In addition, the detection signal of the full switch 48, the detection signal of the ball break switch 187, and the detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295 are input to bits 5 to 7 of the input port 0, respectively. In addition, the operation signal from the error release switch 375 and the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 are input to the bits 0 and 1 of the input port 1, respectively.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the payout control means. In the main process, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S701). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S702), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S703).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a built-in device register (step S704). In the process of setting the internal device register in step S704, the payout control CPU 371 sets the CTC. In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, the payout control CPU 371 performs register setting for setting the channel to be used to timer mode, register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and register setting for setting an interrupt vector. The interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. For example, when it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 1 ms, a value corresponding to 1 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  In step S704, the payout control CPU 371 initializes the priority of interrupt processing to be executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 380. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority order initial setting process (see step S15b) performed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560.

  In step S <b> 704, the payout control CPU 371 sets the serial communication circuit 380. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets the baud rate of the receiving circuit, sets the receiving mode (either 8-bit or 9-bit data format), and sets the parity (the presence or absence of parity, even parity or odd parity). Set). In addition, the control registers of the receiving circuit are initialized and the status registers are initialized. Also, the payout control CPU 371 sets the baud rate of the transmission circuit, sets the transmission mode (either 8-bit or 9-bit data format), and sets the parity (the presence / absence of parity, even parity or odd parity) )I do. Also, each control register of the transmission circuit is initialized.

  The interrupt vector set in the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process of driving the ball payout device 97 in response to a command signal related to award ball payout from the main board, and a ball payout device 97 in response to a ball lending request. A process for driving the program may be included.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 370. Therefore, an interrupt process based on counting up the built-in CTC can be used. Also, an interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU internal clock (system clock) counts down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S705), and performs a RAM clear process (step S706). In addition, initial values are set in the flags and counters of the RAM area (step S707). Note that the processing in step S707 includes processing for setting the unpaid-off number counter initial value in the unpaid-out number counter. In the process of step S707, the payout control CPU 371 also performs a process of clearing an error flag indicating a detection state of a payout number abnormality error, a full tank error, and a ball breakage error. In this embodiment, when it is determined that there is a payout number error and the payout number error error specification bit is set in the error flag, the payout number error error specification bit is not cleared until the power is reset. Although it does not recover from the number abnormality error, specifically, when the process of step S707 is executed when the power is turned on, the payout number abnormality error designation bit in the error flag is cleared and the payout number abnormality error is recovered.

  The payout control CPU 371 executes serial communication circuit setting processing for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S708). In this case, the payout control CPU 371 causes the serial communication circuit 380 to serially communicate with the game control microcomputer 560 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S15a) performed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560. Make settings for Further, as described above, a part of the initial setting of the serial communication circuit 380 is executed in the built-in device register setting process in step S704. Note that all the setting processing of the serial communication circuit 380 may be performed by the serial communication circuit setting processing in step S708.

  Since interruption is prohibited in step S701 of the initial setting process, interruption is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S709). Thereafter, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is entered.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 370 is set so as to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control means. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 371 of the payout control microcomputer 370 executes the following process. First, the payout control CPU 371 performs a switch check process (step S751). In the switch check process, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process of confirming the on / off state of the payout number count switch 301 and the error release switch 375 based on the input of the input port 1. Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs an input determination process (step S752). The input determination process is a process of detecting the state of bits 0 to 7 (see FIG. 62) of the input port 0 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte of the RAM (referred to as a sensor input state flag). The payout control CPU 371 checks the state of the sensor input state flag instead of directly checking the state of the input port when performing control based on the state of bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 50 (step S753). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes main control communication processing for communicating with the game control means of the main board 31 (step S754).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs control for paying out the lent balls in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 50, and performs control for paying out the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board 31. A payout control process to be executed is executed (step S755). In this embodiment, in the case of a big hit game state, and when paying a winning ball based on a win to a big winning opening during a big hit game, at least a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds after finishing the final round of the big hit game, and 20 seconds after finishing the ending effect.)

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a payout motor control process (step S756). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S757). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a prepaid card unit error control process for performing error control of the card unit 50 (step S758). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes information output processing for outputting prize ball information to the main board 31 and outputting the prize ball signal 1 and the gaming machine error state signal to the outside (step S759). Further, display control processing for performing a predetermined display on the error display LED 374 according to the result of the error processing is executed (step S760).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a payout number error error, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, a prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in error processing to be described later, an error corresponding to the detected error is detected. Bit is set. Then, in the display control process of step S760, the payout control CPU 371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 374 based on the fact that the error bit is set.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the payout control CPU 371 includes an output port 0 buffer and an output port. The contents of the port 1 buffer are output to the output port (step S761: output processing). The output port 0 buffer and the output port 1 buffer include a payout motor control process (step S756), a prepaid card control process (step S753), a main control communication process (step S754), an information output process (step S759), and a display control process ( It is updated in step S760).

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the main control communication process of step S754. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) executes a main control command reception process (step S740). Then, the payout control CPU 371 executes one of steps S741 to S744 according to the value of the main control communication control code.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main control command reception process of step S740 in the main control communication process. In the main control command receiving process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not a connection signal is input (step S74001). If no connection signal is input, the payout control CPU 101 initializes the transmission circuit and the reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S74002). As described above, when the connection signal cannot be received, the transmission circuit and the reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 380 are initialized, so that the command is transmitted even though the connection state with the main board 31 is under an abnormal state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which data is stored in the register or the reception data register. Next, the payout control CPU 371 loads the value of the main control communication control code (step S74003), and checks whether or not the value of the main control communication control code is a value “0” indicating the main control connection confirmation process. (Step S74004).

  In this embodiment, in the main control communication process, input of a connection signal from the game control microcomputer 560 is started after power supply to the gaming machine is started, and reception of the first connection confirmation command can be confirmed. The main control connection confirmation process in step S741 is executed. Then, when the reception of the connection confirmation command can be confirmed, the process proceeds to step S742 and subsequent steps, and transmission / reception processing of various payout control commands is executed. Thereafter, if the communication state with the game control microcomputer 560 is maintained normally, one of the processes of steps S742 to S744 is executed, and the main control connection confirmation process of step S741 is basically a game. It will be executed only when the machine is powered on. In step S74004, the fact that the value of the main control communication control code indicates a value other than the main control connection confirmation processing means that after shifting to the processing after step S742, some communication error occurs and the connection signal cannot be input. This is the case. Therefore, if the value of the main control communication control code indicates a value other than the main control connection confirmation process in step S74004, the payout control CPU 371 determines the main control communication error designation bit (game control microcomputer) of the error flag. A bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the communication state with 560) is set (step S74005). The error flag is a flag in which various prize ball errors are set, and is formed in a RAM provided in the payout control microcomputer 370. The payout control CPU 371 sets a value “0” indicating main control connection confirmation processing in the main control communication control code (step S74006). If the value of the main control communication control code is “0” indicating the main control connection confirmation process in step S74004, the process proceeds to step S74006.

  Note that the main control confirmation process in step S741 may be executed exceptionally even after the power is turned on to the gaming machine. Specifically, as described above, after determining that the connection signal is not input in step S74001, if the main control connection confirmation process is not being executed in step S74004, the connection signal is not displayed after the game machine is turned on. It is determined that there is a possibility of being disconnected, and the process returns to the main control connection confirmation process (see step S74006), and again confirms the connection state with the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, a connection confirmation command is issued). Confirm that it can be received (see step S7412). Further, in the main control communication normal processing described later, even if a predetermined period (1050 ms in this example) has elapsed since the connection OK command was transmitted, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received from the game control microcomputer 560. If not, it is determined that some communication abnormality has occurred, and the process returns to the main control connection confirmation process (see steps S74202 and S74203), and the connection state with the game control microcomputer 560 is confirmed again (specifically, Confirm that the connection confirmation command can be received (see step S7412).

  If the connection signal is input, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the reception error flag is set in the status register of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S74007). For example, the payout control CPU 371 receives the serial communication circuit 380 if a flag indicating a parity error, framing error, noise error, overrun error, or idle line error is set in the status register of the serial communication circuit 380. It is determined that there is an error state.

  If the reception error flag is set, the payout control CPU 371 initializes the reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 380 (step S74008). In this way, by initializing the receiving circuit of the serial communication circuit 380 in the case of a reception error state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a reception command is stored in the reception data register even though some reception abnormality has occurred. can do. Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets the main control communication error designation bit of the error flag (step S74009).

  If the reception error flag is not set, the payout control CPU 371 loads the contents of the reception buffer (step S74010) and checks whether or not a connection confirmation command is received (step S74011). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the content of the loaded reception buffer is “A0 (H)” (see FIG. 23). If the connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 proceeds to step S74014.

  If a connection confirmation command has not been received, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a prize ball number command has been received. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the content of the connection number command should be at least “51 (H)” and less than “60 (H)”. Accordingly, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not the content of the loaded reception buffer is equal to or greater than the minimum prize ball number command value “51 (H)” (step S74012). Next, if the prize ball number command minimum judgment value is “51 (H)” or more, the payout control CPU 371 determines whether the content of the loaded reception buffer is less than the prize ball number command maximum judgment value “60 (H)”. It is confirmed whether or not (step S74013). If it is less than the winning ball number command maximum determination value “60 (H)”, the payout control CPU 371 determines that a winning ball number command has been received, and proceeds to step S74014.

  In step S74014, the payout control CPU 371 stores the contents of the reception buffer (connection confirmation command, prize ball number command) in the main control communication reception buffer. The main control communication reception buffer is composed of 1 byte and can store only one reception command at a time. Even with this configuration, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt period (1 ms in this example) in the payout control microcomputer 370 is equal to the timer interrupt period (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560). 4 ms), a situation in which a plurality of payout control commands are received within one timer interrupt does not occur, and there is no inconvenience. In addition, even if the award ball number command is received before receiving the first connection confirmation command due to erroneous processing after turning on the power to the gaming machine, the connection confirmation command is subsequently issued. If it is received, it is overwritten and stored in the main control communication reception buffer. Therefore, there is a situation in which the connection confirmation command cannot be confirmed at all in the main control connection confirmation process (step S741) described later, and it becomes impossible to shift to the main control communication normal process. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a main control connection confirmation process (step S741) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 0. In the main control connection confirmation process, the payout control CPU 371 loads the contents of the main control communication reception buffer (step S7411), and confirms whether or not a connection confirmation command is received (step S7412). If a connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 sets a connection OK command (step S7413) and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S7414). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S7414, a process of setting a control state (an error state such as a payout number error error, a ball runout error, a full tank error, a prize ball error, etc.) in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command is performed. Done. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S7415). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a connection OK command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when transmitting the connection OK command in step S7415. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the main control communication normal process in the main control communication control code (step S7416). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) to the main control communication control timer (step S7417).

  68 and 69 are flowcharts showing main control communication normal processing (step S742) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 1. FIG. In the main control communication normal process, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S74201) and checks whether the main control communication control timer has timed out (step S74202).

  In this embodiment, as described above, every time one second elapses after the connection OK command is received from the payout control microcomputer 370, the next connection confirmation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. Therefore, if the main control communication control timer has timed out in step S74202, it means that the next connection confirmation command is issued even if 1050 ms (see steps S7417 and S74209) elapses after 1 second has elapsed since the transmission of the connection OK command. This is a case where reception was not possible. Therefore, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “0” indicating the main control connection confirmation process in the main control communication control code (step S74203), returns to the main control connection confirmation process, and controls to wait for the recovery of the communication state. To do.

  If the main control communication control timer has timed out in step S74202, the payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  If the main control communication control timer has not timed out, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer (step S74204). If a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the received command is a connection confirmation command (step S74205). If a connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 sets a connection OK command (step S74206) and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74207). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S74207, a process for setting a control state (an error state such as a payout number error error, a ball out error, a full tank error, a prize ball error) in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command is performed. Done. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74208). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a connection OK command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when the connection OK command is transmitted in step S74208. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74209).

  If the command received in step S74205 is not a connection confirmation command, it means that a prize ball number command has been received. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the error flag is 0 (step S74210). If the value of the error flag is not 0 (that is, if it is in an error state and any error bit is set), the process proceeds to step S74219. If the value of the error flag is 0 (that is, if no error state is set and no error bit is set), the payout control CPU 371 checks whether a BRDY signal is input. (Step S74211). If the BRDY signal is input, the process proceeds to step S74219.

  If the BRDY signal is not input, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag indicating the payout control state (step S74212), and confirms whether the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is in progress. (Step S74213). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 specifies a prize ball payout operation designation bit (bit indicating that a prize ball payout operation is in progress) or a ball lending payout operation designation bit (in a ball lending payout operation) in the payout control state flag. It is confirmed whether or not a bit indicating that is set. If the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S74219. In this embodiment, since the next prize ball number command is transmitted after the prize ball payout operation is finished and the prize ball end command is received, the step is performed unless an abnormality such as a communication error occurs. In S74213, it is not determined that the prize ball payout operation is in progress.

  If neither the winning ball payout operation nor the ball lending payout operation is in progress, the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command can be started immediately. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets the lower 4 bits of the main control communication reception buffer (that is, the number of winning balls set in the winning ball number command) in the unpaid-out number counter (step S74214). The unpaid-out number counter is a counter for counting the number of unpaid out prize balls and rental balls.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit a prize ball number acceptance command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74215). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball number acceptance command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when it transmits a prize ball number acceptance command in step S74215. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “3” indicating the main control communication end process in the main control communication control code (step S74216). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74218). It should be noted that if a prize ball payout operation is not completed after a lapse of one second after the prize ball number acceptance command is transmitted based on the value set in step S74218, a prize ball preparation command is transmitted.

  In step S74219, the payout control CPU 371 stores the lower 4 bits of the main control communication reception buffer (that is, the number of prize balls set with the prize ball number command) in the main control communication prize ball number buffer. That is, in this case, an error state has occurred, or during the winning ball payout operation, the ball lending payout operation, or during the ball lending preparation, the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command is immediately performed. Can't start. Therefore, the payout control CPU 371 suspends the reply of the prize ball number acceptance command and temporarily saves the prize ball number set in the prize ball number command in the main control communication prize ball number buffer.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a command for preparing a prize ball (step S74220), and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74221). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S74221, a control state (error state such as a payout number error error, a ball runout error, a full tank error, a prize ball error, etc.) is set in the lower 4 bits of the command for preparing a prize ball. Processing is performed. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74222). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball preparing command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  Note that the payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when the award ball preparing command is transmitted in step S74222. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “2” indicating the main control communication process to the main control communication control code (step S74223). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) to the main control communication control timer (step S74224). It should be noted that, after the command for preparing a prize ball is transmitted based on the value set in step S74224, the command for preparing the next prize ball is transmitted if it is not ready to start the prize ball payout operation after one second has elapsed. Will be.

  70 and 71 are flowcharts showing the main control communication in-process (step S743) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 2. In the main control communication process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer (step S74301). If a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the received command is a connection confirmation command (step S74302). If it is not a connection confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S74306. If a connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 sets a connection OK command (step S74303) and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74304). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S74304, a process of setting a control state (an error state such as a payout number error error, a ball out error, a full tank error, a prize ball error) in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command is performed. Done. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74305). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a connection OK command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380. Then, the process proceeds to step S74306.

  In step S74306, the payout control CPU 371 sets a main control communication error designation bit in the error flag. That is, the main control communication process is a process that is executed after receiving the prize ball number command until the prize ball payout operation can be started based on the received prize ball number command. Since the response of the command is suspended, the game control microcomputer 560 is in a waiting state for receiving the award ball number reception command. During this time, a new payout control command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. There should be no. Nevertheless, since receiving a new command can determine that some abnormality has occurred in the communication state, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for setting a main control communication error designation bit.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when the main control communication error designation bit is set in step S74306. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the main control communication normal process in the main control communication control code (step S74307). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74308).

  If there is no reception command in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S74309), and checks whether the main control communication control timer has timed out (step S74309). S74310).

  If the main control communication control timer has timed out (Y in step S74310), it means that one second or more has elapsed since the previous prize ball preparation command was transmitted. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets a prize ball preparing command in order to transmit the next prize ball preparing command (step S74311), and executes a main control transmission command conversion process (step S74312). In the main control transmission command conversion process of step S74312, the control state (error status such as a payout number error error, a ball out error, a full tank error, a prize ball error, etc.) is set in the lower 4 bits of the command for preparing a prize ball Processing is performed. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74313). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball preparing command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74314). It should be noted that, after the command for preparing a prize ball is transmitted based on the value set in step S74314, a command for preparing the next prize ball is issued if it is not yet ready to start a prize ball payout operation after one second has passed. Will be sent.

  If the main control communication control timer has not timed out, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the error flag is 0 (step S74315). If the value of the error flag is not 0 (that is, if it is in an error state and one of the error bits is set), the winning ball payout operation cannot be started yet, so the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the error flag is 0 (that is, if no error state is set and no error bit is set), the payout control CPU 371 checks whether a BRDY signal is input. (Step S74316). If the BRDY signal has been input, the winning ball payout operation cannot be started yet, and the process is terminated as it is.

  If the BRDY signal is not input, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag indicating the payout control state (step S74317), and confirms whether the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is in progress. (Step S74318). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 specifies a prize ball payout operation designation bit (bit indicating that a prize ball payout operation is in progress) or a ball lending payout operation designation bit (in a ball lending payout operation) in the payout control state flag. It is confirmed whether or not a bit indicating that is set. If the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is in progress, the winning ball payout operation cannot be started yet, so the processing is ended as it is. In this embodiment, since the next award ball number command is transmitted after the award ball payout operation is finished and the award ball end command is received, the step is performed unless an abnormality such as a communication error occurs. In S74318, it is not determined that a prize ball payout operation is in progress.

  If neither the winning ball payout operation nor the ball lending payout operation is in progress, it means that the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command can be started. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets the lower 4 bits of the main control communication prize ball number buffer (that is, the temporarily saved prize ball number) in the unpaid number counter (step S74319).

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the winning ball payout operation cannot be started immediately when the winning ball number command is received, the winning ball number specified by the winning ball number command is immediately set to the unpaid number. Instead of being set in the counter, it is temporarily saved in the main control communication award ball number buffer, but this control is performed, for example, by adding the award ball number to the unpaid number counter during the lending ball payout operation. This is to prevent inconvenience in processing related to payout control, such as preventing a situation where the number of winning balls cannot be accurately managed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit a prize ball number acceptance command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74320). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball number acceptance command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “3” indicating the main control communication end process in the main control communication control code (step S74321). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74322). It should be noted that if a prize ball payout operation is not completed after a lapse of one second after the prize ball number acceptance command is transmitted based on the value set in step S74322, a prize ball preparing command is transmitted.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a main control communication end process (step S744) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 3. In the main control communication end process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer (step S74401). If a reception command is stored in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the received command is a connection confirmation command (step S74402). If it is not a connection confirmation command, the process proceeds to step S74406. If a connection confirmation command has been received, the payout control CPU 371 sets a connection OK command (step S74403) and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74404). In the main control transmission command conversion process of step S74404, a process of setting a control state (an error state such as a payout number error error, a ball out error, a full tank error, a prize ball error) in the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command is performed. Done. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74405). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a connection OK command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380. Then, control goes to a step S74406.

  In step S74406, the payout control CPU 371 sets a main control communication error designation bit in the error flag. That is, the main control communication end process is a process executed after receiving the prize ball number command and starting the prize ball payout operation until the prize ball payout operation based on the received prize ball number command is ended. Since the microcomputer 560 is in a waiting state for receiving the winning ball end command, it is unlikely that a new payout control command will be received from the game control microcomputer 560 during this period. Nevertheless, since receiving a new command can determine that some abnormality has occurred in the communication state, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for setting a main control communication error designation bit.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when the main control communication error designation bit is set in step S74406. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the main control communication normal process in the main control communication control code (step S74407). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74408).

  If there is no reception command in the main control communication reception buffer, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S74409), and checks whether the main control communication control timer has timed out (step S74409). S74410).

  If the main control communication control timer has timed out (Y in step S74410), it means that one second or more has elapsed since the last time a prize ball acceptance command or a prize ball preparation command was transmitted. In this case, the payout control CPU 371 sets a prize ball preparing command in order to transmit the next prize ball preparing command (step S74411), and executes main control transmission command conversion processing (step S74412). In the main control transmission command conversion process in step S74412, a control state (error state such as a payout number error error, a ball runout error, a full tank error, a prize ball error, etc.) is set in the lower 4 bits of the command for preparing a prize ball. Processing is performed. Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit the converted prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74413). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for outputting a prize ball preparing command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1 second in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74414). It should be noted that, after the command for preparing a prize ball is transmitted based on the value set in step S74414, the command for preparing the next prize ball is transmitted if the prize ball payout operation is not yet completed after one second has passed. It will be.

  If the main control communication control timer has not timed out, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag (step S74415), and checks whether or not a prize ball payout operation is in progress (step S74416). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a prize ball payout operation specifying bit is set in the payout control state flag. If the winning ball payout operation is in progress, it means that the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command has not been finished yet, and the payout control CPU 371 ends the process as it is. If no winning ball payout operation is in progress, it means that the winning ball payout operation based on the received winning ball number command has ended. Therefore, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to transmit a prize ball end command to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S74417). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process of outputting a prize ball end command to the transmission register of the serial communication circuit 380.

  The payout control CPU 371 clears the main control communication reception buffer when it transmits the winning ball end command in step S74417. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the received command is erroneously recognized in the subsequent processing and the erroneous processing is executed.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the main control communication normal process in the main control communication control code (step S74418). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined value (1050 ms in this example) in the main control communication control timer (step S74419).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing main control transmission command conversion processing executed in steps S7414, S74207, S74221, S74304, S74312, S74404, and S74412. In the main control transmission command conversion process, the payout control CPU 371 first loads an error flag and checks whether or not the payout number abnormality error designation bit is set (step S731). If the payout number abnormality error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets a main control communication payout number error error output bit (specifically, bit 3) in the conversion buffer (step S732).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the ball break error designation bit is set (step S733). If the ball-out error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the main control communication ball-out output bit (specifically bit 2) in the conversion buffer (step S734).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the full error designation bit is set (step S735). If the full error specification bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the full output bit for main control communication (specifically bit 1) of the conversion buffer (step S736).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not other prize ball error designation bits are set (step S737). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 includes a main control communication error designation bit, a main control unconnected error designation bit, a withdrawal switch abnormality detection error 1 designation bit, a withdrawal switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, a withdrawal in the error flag. Check if the case error specification bit is set. If any other prize ball error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets a main control communication ball out output bit (specifically bit 0) in the conversion buffer (step S738).

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets the contents of the conversion buffer in the payout control command (connection OK command or prize ball preparing command) set for transmission (step S739).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the payout control process in step S755. In the payout control process, the payout control CPU 371 confirms that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on (step S7501), and checks whether the value of the unpaid number counter is 0. (Step S7502). If the value of the unpaid number counter is 0, the payout control CPU 371 adds 1 to the value of the payout number abnormality counter for counting the cumulative number of abnormal payouts (step S7503). In other words, Y in step S7502 means that the unpaid number to be paid out is not set in the unpaid-out number counter, so that the payout operation is not performed even though the game ball should not be paid out. And the payout count switch 301 detects the payout of the game ball. For this reason, there is a possibility that the payout operation has been performed by some kind of fraud, so the payout control CPU 101 cumulatively adds 1 to the value of the payout number abnormality counter.

  The payout number abnormality counter indicates the number of payouts exceeding the number of unpaid game balls to be paid out and the number of payout shortages that did not meet the number of unpaid game balls to be paid out. This is a counter for cumulatively counting. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when the value of the payout number abnormality counter becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (2000 in this example), it is determined that a payout number error has occurred and the payout is stopped. Processing to control the state is performed. Note that the process of step S7503 corresponds to a process of cumulatively counting the excess payout in the payout number abnormality counter.

  In this embodiment, without distinguishing whether the ball is a winning ball or a lending ball, the payout excess number and the payout shortage number are cumulatively counted in the payout number abnormality counter. For only one of the rented balls, the excessive payout and the shortage payout may be cumulatively counted in the payout number abnormality counter. Further, for example, with respect to prize balls and lending balls, it is possible to cumulatively count the excess payout and the shortage payout using separate counters. In this case, it may be determined that a payout number error occurs when the value of one of the counters reaches a predetermined threshold value, or a payout number error error when the total value of both counters reaches a predetermined threshold value. May be determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case where the value of the payout number abnormality counter is incremented by 1 when an excessive payout is detected in step S7503 is shown. It is not limited to what is shown in the form. For example, conversely, the excessive payout number may be subtracted from the value of the payout number abnormality counter, and the insufficient payout number may be added to the value of the payout number abnormality counter. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 371 sets “2000” as the initial value in the payout number abnormality counter in the initial setting process when the power is turned on, and subtracts 1 from the value of the payout number abnormality counter in step S7503. In steps S75320, S75325, and S75335, which will be described later, a value corresponding to the insufficient payout number may be added to the value of the payout number abnormality counter. For example, in the processing of steps S7504, S75321, and S7725, which will be described later, it is determined that a payout number abnormality error has occurred based on the value of the payout number abnormality counter being 2000 or less. Good.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the added payout number abnormality counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000) (step S7504). If it is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000), the payout control CPU 371 determines that a payout number error error has occurred, and indicates a payout number error error indicating that a payout number error error has occurred. A flag is set (step S7505). That is, in this embodiment, the number of abnormal payouts detected is cumulatively managed on the payout control microcomputer 370 side, and if the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number abnormal error determination value (for example, 2000), It is determined that there is an extremely high possibility that a payout operation is being performed due to some sort of fraud, and it is determined that a payout number abnormality error (an error indicating that the number of game balls paid out is abnormal) has occurred. In addition, there are not a few cases where game balls are excessively paid out or insufficient payout due to malfunctions, etc. The frequency determined as a payout number abnormality error becomes higher than necessary, and the game is hindered. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of abnormal payouts detected is cumulatively managed, and the payout number abnormality error is determined on the condition that the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value (for example, 2000). By determining, it is prevented that it is determined that the payout number abnormality error is more than necessary.

  In this embodiment, if it is determined that there is a payout number error and the payout number error error flag is set once, the payout number error error flag is not cleared until the power is reset, and the payout number error error is not recovered. When the payout number abnormality error flag is set, the processes in steps S7504 and S7505 and the processes in S75321, S75322, S7725, and S7726 described later may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent useless processing after it is once determined that the payout number abnormality error has occurred, and to reduce the processing burden.

  Further, in this embodiment, “2000” corresponding to the number of game balls that can be stored in a game ball storage box (so-called dollar box) generally used in a game store is set as a predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value. Although the case where it uses is shown, other values (for example, 1000 or 3000) may be used as the predetermined payout number abnormality error determination value.

  In this embodiment, the payout control process shown in FIG. 74 is a process that is commonly executed when the prize ball payout operation is executed and when the lending ball payout operation is executed. This counter is used in common when counting the number of game balls that have not been paid out with prize balls and when counting the number of game balls that have not been paid out with lending balls. When an abnormality in the number of payouts is detected, the value of the payout number abnormality counter is incremented without distinguishing between payout with a prize ball and payout with a lending ball, and whether or not a payout number abnormality error has occurred. A determination is made.

  If the value of the unpaid-out number counter is not 0, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the unpaid-out number counter (step S7506), and a payout ball detection designation bit (game ball payout) is added to the flag of the payout control state. A bit indicating detection) is set (step S7507). The payout ball detection designation bit is a bit that is set when the payout number count switch 301 is turned on, and indicates that the payout number count switch 301 has detected at least one game ball during the payout operation. is there.

  Thereafter, the payout control CPU 371 executes any one of steps S7511 to S7513 according to the value of the payout control code.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the payout start waiting process (step S7511) executed when the payout control code is 0. In the payout start waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks whether or not the value of the error flag is 0 (step S75101). If an error bit (one or more of all error bits in the error flag) is set, the payout control CPU 371 controls not to execute the subsequent processing. In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S75101, it is determined that there is a payout number abnormal error, and the payout number abnormal error designation bit of the error bit is set, so that the steps after step S75102 are set. Control is performed so as not to shift to processing, and the payout is stopped.

  If the value of the error flag is 0, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the BRDY signal is input (step S75102). If the BRDY signal is input, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag (step S75103), and checks whether or not a ball lending request is being made (step S75104). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a ball lending request specifying bit (a bit indicating that a ball lending request is being made) is set in the payout control state flag. The payout control CPU 371 may determine whether or not a ball lending request is being made by confirming whether or not a BRQ signal is input. If a ball lending request is being made (that is, when a ball lending payout operation is started), the payout control CPU 371 resets the ball lending request specifying bit of the payout control state flag (step S75105) and at the same time a payout control state flag. The designated bit during the ball lending / dispensing operation is set (step S75016). Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined ball lending number (25 in this example) in the unpaid number counter (step S75107) and a predetermined ball lending number (25 in this example) in the payout motor rotation number buffer. Is set (step S75108). Then, control goes to a step S75113.

  The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S756). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer.

  If the BRDY signal is not input, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the unpaid-out number counter is 0 (step S75109). If the value of the unpaid number counter is not 0 (that is, when the prize ball payout operation is started), the payout control CPU 371 sets the value of the unpaid number counter in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S75110). That is, in this case, the number of prize balls specified by the received prize ball number command should be set in the unpaid-out number counter (see steps S74214 and S74319), so that the prize ball payout operation is started. Then, a process of setting the number of prize balls in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer is performed. Next, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag (step S75111), and sets a prize ball paying-out operation designation bit in the payout control state flag (step S75112). Then, control goes to a step S75113.

  In step S75113, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value in the payout motor control code for selecting a process to be executed in the payout motor control process according to the payout motor activation process. Thereby, in the payout motor control process in step S756, a payout motor starting process for starting the payout motor 289 is executed, and a lending ball payout operation or a prize ball payout operation is started. Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the payout motor stop waiting process in the payout control code (step S75114), and ends the process.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a payout motor stop waiting process (step S7512) executed when the payout control code is 1. In the payout motor stop waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 first loads a payout control state flag (step S7521), and checks whether or not the payout operation is completed (step S7522). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a payout operation end designation bit (a bit indicating that the payout operation has ended) is set in the payout control state flag. The payout operation end designation bit is set in the payout motor brake process and the payout motor ball biting release process in the payout motor control process in step S756 shown in FIG.

  In the payout motor control processing, the payout control CPU 371 performs payout motor normal processing (processing such as setting the pointer at the head address of the table stored in the ROM), payout, according to the value of the payout motor control code. Motor start-up processing (processing such as setting the initial value of the excitation pattern in bits 4 to 7 of the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0), payout motor slow-up processing (starting the rotation of the payout motor 289 smoothly) Therefore, the output state of the output port 0 is read out by reading the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at intervals longer than those in the case of constant speed processing and gradually approaching the time intervals in the case of constant speed processing. , Processing of setting bits 4 to 7 in the port 0 buffer corresponding to), payout motor constant speed processing (periodic payout motor excitation pattern) The process of reading the contents of the table and setting the bits 4 to 7 of the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0), the dispensing motor brake process (the constant speed process to smoothly stop the dispensing motor 289) Port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0 by reading out the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at intervals longer than those in the case of, and gradually away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing Processing of setting the bits 4 to 7), the payout motor ball biting process (when the ball biting state is detected, in order to release the ball biting, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table are read and the output port 0 is set. Processing to set bits 4 to 7 in the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state), and the payout motor ball biting release processing (ball biting state is released) Either processing shifts to the payout motor normal processing process returns to the normal motor control state) execution.

  If the payout operation has been completed, the payout control CPU 371 resets the payout operation end designation bit of the payout control state flag (step S7523) and stops the payout motor used for setting a payout passage monitoring time to be described later. The waiting process setting table 2 is set (step S7524).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout ball number inspected designation bit is set in the payout control state flag (step S7525). The designated number of paid-out balls inspected is a bit indicating that the detection of the number-of-payout count switch 301 has been determined at the end of the payout operation by the payout motor 289 (at the end of normal operation). If the payout ball number inspected designation bit is set, the process proceeds to step S7527. If the payout ball number inspected designation bit is not set, the payout control CPU 371 sets a payout motor stop waiting process setting table (step S7526). That is, the payout control CPU 371 replaces the table set in step S7524 with a payout motor stop waiting process setting table. Then, control goes to a step S7527.

  In step S7527, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “2” indicating payout passing waiting processing in the payout control code. The payout control CPU 371 sets the payout passing monitoring time in the payout control timer based on the table set in steps S7524 and S7526 (step S7527). The payout passing monitoring time is a time that has a margin in the time from when the last payout ball is paid out by the payout motor 289 until it passes through the payout number count switch 301. In this embodiment, when the payout ball number inspected bit is set in step S7525, 1 second is set as the payout passing monitoring time based on the payout motor stop waiting process setting table 2 set in step S7524. To do. If the paid ball number inspected bit is not set in step S7525, 0.6 seconds is set as the payout passing monitoring time based on the payout motor stop waiting process setting table replaced in step S7526.

  77 to 79 are flowcharts showing a payout passing waiting process (step S7513) executed when the value of the payout control code is 2. In the payout passing waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks the value of the payout control timer (step S75301). If the value is 0, the process proceeds to step S75304. If the value of the payout control timer is not 0, the value of the payout control timer is decremented by 1 (step S75302). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0 (step S75303), that is, if the payout control timer has not timed out, the process is terminated.

  If the payout control timer has timed out, the payout control CPU 371 loads the error flag, and sets the payout number abnormality error designation bit, the dispensing switch abnormality detection error 1 designation bit, or the dispensing switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit. It is confirmed whether or not (step S75304). If any one of the payout number abnormality error designation bit, the dispensing switch abnormality detection error 1 designation bit, or the dispensing switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit is set, it is determined that the dispensing operation cannot be continued any more, and the process proceeds to step S75306. Transition. If none of the payout number error error specification bit, the payout switch error detection error 1 specification bit, and the payout switch error detection error 2 specification bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the value of the unpaid number counter to 0. It is confirmed whether or not (step S75305). If the value of the unpaid-out counter is 0, the payout control CPU 371 assumes that the payout operation has ended normally, loads a payout control state flag (step S75306), and is requesting a ballot for the payout control state flag. Bits other than the designated bit and the payout operation end designation bit are reset (step S75307). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “0” indicating the payout start waiting process in the payout control code (step S75308), and ends the process.

  If the value of the unpaid-out number counter is not 0, the payout control CPU 371 loads an error flag and confirms whether or not the ball breakage error designation bit or the full tank error designation bit is set (step S75309). . If the ball breakage error designation bit or the full tank error designation bit is set, the processing is terminated as it is. If neither the ball breakage error designation bit nor the full tank error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout case error designation bit is set in the error flag (step S75310). If the payout case error designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 loads the payout control status flag (step S75311), and sets the payout ball number checked designation bit in the payout control status flag (step S75312). . The payout control CPU 371 also includes a 1 designation bit during re-payout operation (bit indicating execution of the first re-payout operation) and a 2 designation bit during re-payout operation (execution of the second re-payout operation). Is reset (step S75313), and the process is terminated.

  Note that the designated number of paid-out balls has been inspected is a bit indicating that the detection of the number-of-payout count switch 301 has been determined at the end of the payout operation by the payout motor 289 (at the end of normal operation). Note that, when the value of the unpaid-out number counter remains two or more despite the end of the payout operation, the remaining number is added to the payout number abnormality counter. Further, the detection determination by the payout number count switch 301 at the end of the payout operation is executed only once every time the payout operation is executed, and the payout motor ball biting process or the payout motor ball bite releasing process is executed. It is not executed when the biting operation is finished (specifically, since the payout case error designation bit is set in the ball biting state, the ball biting operation is performed by setting the payout ball number checked designation bit in advance in step S75312. (The detection determination by the payout number count switch 301 is not performed even if the operation is finished). It should be noted that the payout ball number inspected designation bit is also set when the payout motor constant speed process in the payout motor control process becomes full.

  If the payout case error designation bit is not set in step S75310, the payout control CPU 371 loads a payout control state flag (step S75314) and performs processing for executing re-payout processing after step S75315.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control CPU 371 first checks whether or not the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation of the payout control state flag is set (step S75315). If it is not set, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the 1 designation bit during re-payout operation of the payout control state flag is set (step S75316). If the 1 designation bit during re-payout operation is not set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the 1 designation bit during re-payout operation in the payout control state flag in order to execute the first re-payout operation (step S75317). .

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout ball number inspected designation bit is set in the payout control state flag (step S75318). If the specified number of paid-out balls is inspected, the process proceeds to step S75326. If the specified number of paid-out balls has been inspected, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the unpaid-out number counter is 2 or more (step S75319). If the value of the unpaid-out number counter is not 2 or more, the process proceeds to step S75326. If the value of the unpaid number counter is 2 or more, the payout control CPU 371 adds the value of the unpaid number counter to the payout number abnormality counter (step S75320). Note that the process of step S75320 corresponds to a process of cumulatively counting the number of shortage payouts in the payout number abnormality counter. Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the added payout number abnormality counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000) (step S75321). If it is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000), the payout control CPU 371 determines that a payout number error error has occurred, and indicates a payout number error error indicating that a payout number error error has occurred. A flag is set (step S75322).

  In this embodiment, the payout is performed on condition that the value of the unpaid-out number counter remains at a predetermined reference number (2 in this example) even though the payout operation is finished by the process of step S75319. The value of the unpaid number counter is added to the number abnormality counter. That is, since the payout operation is terminated due to a malfunction or the like, the value of the unpaid-out number counter remains in a small number (1 in this example). If even one unsettled number counter value remains, the accumulated number is immediately counted as a cumulative number in the payout number abnormality counter, and the frequency determined as a payout number abnormality error is increased more than necessary, causing problems to the game. End up. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the condition that the value of the unpaid-out number counter remains 2 or more with a little allowance, the accumulated number is counted in the payout number abnormality counter, and it is determined that there is an unnecessarily large number of payout errors. Is prevented. The process of step S75319 shows a case where the payout number abnormality counter is cumulatively counted up on condition that the payout shortage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (2 in this example). Alternatively, the payout number abnormality counter may be counted up cumulatively on condition that the number is a predetermined reference number (2 in this example) or more. In this case, for example, on the condition that the number of times determined as Y in step S7502 shown in FIG. Count up. In addition, in the processes of steps S75319 and S75320, the value of the unpaid number counter is always used as the unpaid number counter regardless of whether or not the unpaid number counter value remains equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (2 in this example). You may make it add.

  If the 1 designation bit during re-payout operation is set in step S75316, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the dispensed ball detection designation bit is set in the payout control state flag (step S75323). If the payout ball detection designation bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 proceeds to step S75326. If the payout ball detection designation bit is not set, the payout control CPU 371 sets the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation in the payout control state flag to execute the second re-payout operation (step S75324). Then, 1 is added to the value of the payout number abnormality counter (step S75325). Note that the process of step S75325 corresponds to a process of cumulatively counting the number of shortage payouts in the payout number abnormality counter. Then, control goes to a step S75326. Note that by executing the processing of step S75325, the value of the payout number abnormality counter is incremented by 1 when the re-payout operation is not performed normally despite the execution of the first re-payout operation. The Even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the unpaid-out number counter may not be 0 due to an erroneous count or the like. Therefore, if the payout ball detection designation bit is set by executing the process of step S75323, that is, if the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the payout operation. Since there is a possibility that the payout has been completed normally, the process proceeds to step S75326 without performing the cumulative count of the payout number abnormality counter.

  In step S75326, the payout control CPU 371 sets 1 as the number of repaid operations in order to execute the first repaid operation. Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets the number of re-payout operations (1 in this example) in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer (step S75327). Next, the payout control CPU 371 loads the payout control state flag (step S75328), and resets the payout ball detection designation bit of the payout control state flag (step 75329).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value in the payout motor control code for selecting a process executed in the payout motor control process in accordance with the payout motor activation process (step S75330). Thereby, in the payout motor control process of step S756, the payout motor starting process for starting the payout motor 289 is executed, and the re-payout operation is started. Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value “1” indicating the payout motor stop waiting process in the payout control code (step S75331), and ends the process.

  If the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation is set in step S75315, the payout control CPU 371 resets the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation of the payout control state flag (step S75332). Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout ball detection designation bit of the payout control state flag is set (step S75333). If the payout ball detection designation bit is set, the process proceeds to step S75326. If the payout ball detection designation bit is not set, the payout control CPU 371 resets the 2 designation bit during re-payout operation of the payout control state flag (step S75334) and adds 1 to the value of the payout number abnormality counter (step S75334). Step S75335). Note that the process of step S75335 corresponds to a process of cumulatively counting the number of shortage payouts in the payout number abnormality counter. Also, by executing the process of step S75335, even if the second re-payout operation is executed, if the re-payout operation is not performed normally, the value of the payout number abnormality counter is incremented by one. Even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the unpaid-out number counter may not be 0 due to an erroneous count or the like. Therefore, if the payout ball detection designation bit is set by executing the process of step S75333, that is, if the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the payout operation. Since there is a possibility that the payout has been completed normally, the process proceeds to step S75326 without performing the cumulative count of the payout number abnormality counter.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 loads an error flag, and sets a payout case error designation bit in the error flag (step S75336). Then, the payout control CPU 371 sets a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) in the re-payout waiting timer (step S75337) and ends the process. The re-payout waiting timer set in step S57337 is measured by error processing described later (see step S7710), and the payout case error designation bit in the error flag is reset based on the time-out of the re-payout timer. (See steps S7711 and S7712). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, after the payout case error is detected, the error state is automatically recovered based on the fact that two minutes have passed.

  Next, error processing will be described. 80 and 81 are flowcharts showing the error processing in step S757. In the error processing, the payout control CPU 371 first loads an error flag, and the error flag payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, a payout case error designation bit, a main control communication error designation bit, and a payout number abnormality error designation bit. The other error bits are reset (step S7701). Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the error flag is 0 (step S7702). If the value of the error flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S7710. If the value of the error flag is not 0 (that is, if the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the withdrawal case error designation bit, the main control communication error designation bit, or the withdrawal number abnormality error designation bit is set) The control CPU 371 checks whether or not the operation signal is turned on from the error release switch 375 (step S7703). When the operation signal is turned on, the error recovery time is set in the pre-error recovery timer (step S7709). The error recovery time is the time from when the error release switch 375 is operated until the actual return from the error state to the normal state.

  If the operation signal from the error release switch 375 is not on, the value of the timer before error recovery is confirmed (step S7704). If the value of the timer before error recovery is 0, that is, if the timer before error recovery is not set, the process proceeds to step S7710. If the pre-error recovery timer is set, the value of the pre-error recovery timer is decremented by -1 (step S7705). If the pre-error recovery timer value becomes 0 (step S7706), the payout switch of the error flags The abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the payout case error designation bit, and the main control communication error designation bit are reset (step S7707), and if set, the re-payout waiting timer is reset (step S7708). Then, control goes to a step S7710. If the pre-error recovery timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step S7713.

  When the processing of step S7707 is executed, there may be an error bit that is not in the set state among the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the payout case error designation bit, and the main control communication error designation bit. There is no problem even if the error bit that is not in the set state is reset. As described above, in this embodiment, when an error that causes the setting of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, and the main control communication error bit occurs, the error release switch 375 is pressed. The error is canceled by being done.

  In step S7710, if set, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the re-payout waiting timer, and checks whether the re-payout wait timer after the subtraction has timed out (step S7711). If the re-payout waiting timer has timed out, the payout control CPU 371 resets the payout case error designation bit of the error flag (step S7712). Then, control goes to a step S7713.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the payout case error is detected and the payout detection error designation bit is set by executing the processes of steps S7707 and S7712, the error release switch 375 is pressed. On the condition that the error has been canceled (more precisely, the time before error recovery has passed) and on the condition that a predetermined time (2 minutes in this example) has passed after detection of the payout case error The error may be automatically canceled. In this embodiment, regarding the payout number abnormality error, once detected, it is not canceled unless the power supply to the gaming machine is reset.

  When the processing of steps S7707 and S7712 is executed and the payout case error designation bit is reset, the payout control code is “2” (corresponding to the execution of the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 77 to 79). Then, the game ball payout retry operation is started. That is, when the payout control process in step S755 is executed next, if the payout passing waiting process in step S7513 is executed, the repayout process is performed again. For example, if a prize ball payout process has been performed and the value of the unpaid-out number counter is not 0, the process proceeds from step S75305 to steps S75309 and S75310, and the payout case error designation bit is in the reset state in step S75310. Therefore, the process for starting the re-payout process after step S75314 is executed again, and the re-payout process is executed.

  As described above, the payout control means is used for paying out a game ball when the payout number count switch 301 detects no game ball even though the ball payout device 97 pays out a game ball. After performing the correct payout control for causing the ball payout device 97 to execute the retry operation for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) as a limit, the payout number count switch 301 has detected no game balls. When detected (see step S75314 and subsequent steps in FIGS. 77 to 79), the control state related to payout is shifted to an error state, and an error release signal is output from the error release switch 375 in the error state, or a payout case Corrected payout that makes correction payout control again on condition that a predetermined time (2 minutes in this example) has passed since the error was detected To run the control restart processing.

  Further, even during the re-payout process in the error state (specifically, during the re-payout process before setting the payout case error and during the re-payout process after pressing the error release switch 375), step S7501 shown in FIG. S7502 and S7506 are executed. That is, even when an error relating to payout occurs, if the game ball passes the payout number count switch 301, the value of the unpaid-off number counter is subtracted. Accordingly, the value of the unpaid-out number counter when returning from the error state is a value reflecting the number of game balls actually paid out. That is, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of game balls actually paid out can be accurately managed.

  Also, in the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, even when it is confirmed that the game ball has been paid out as a result of the re-payout process, the payout case error bit is not reset. The bit of the payout case error is reset only when the error release switch 375 is operated (specifically, when an error return time after operation has elapsed) or when a payout case error is detected for a predetermined time. (2 minutes in this example) has elapsed (steps S7707, S7712). That is, until a predetermined time (in this example, 2 minutes) has passed since the detection of the payout case error, the payout case error (insufficient payout) is automatically determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the payout number count switch 301. The error) state is not canceled, and the payout case error is not canceled without an artificial operation. Therefore, the game store clerk and the like can surely recognize that a shortage of payout has occurred. However, in this embodiment, at least a long time (2 minutes in this example) after the occurrence of the payout case error is configured to automatically cancel the payout case error so that the payout case error is generated. Prevents continued for longer than necessary.

  In some cases, a gaming machine may be configured such that a hardware reset (reset to the payout control CPU 371) is performed by operating the error release switch 375. However, when such a gaming machine is configured, When the error release switch 375 is operated, for example, the value of the unpaid number counter is also cleared. However, in this embodiment, since the payout control means is configured to perform the re-payout operation again by operating the error release switch 375, the payout process is executed reliably, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can not be given.

  In step S7713, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the full switch 48. If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output (if it is in the ON state), the full tank error designation bit in the error flag is set (step S7714).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 (step S7715). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output (if it is on), the ball break error designation bit in the error flag is set (step S7716).

  Furthermore, the payout control CPU 371 checks the state of the connection signal from the main board 31 (step S7717), and if the connection signal is not output (if it is in the off state), sets the main board unconnected error designation bit. (Step S7718).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 among the switch timers in which the state of the detection signal of each switch is set, and the value is the switch on maximum time (for example, “ 250 ") (step S7719), the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 is set in the error flag (step S7720). It should be noted that the value of each switch timer is incremented by 1 when the state of the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input is switched on in the input determination process of step S752, and cleared by 0 when it is off. Accordingly, the fact that the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 exceeds the switch on maximum time means that the payout number count switch 301 is in the on state exceeding the switch on maximum time. Then, it is determined that the game ball is clogged at the disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or at the portion of the payout number count switch 301.

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 loads the payout control state flag when the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 becomes a switch-on determination value (for example, “4”) (step S7721). In step S7722), it is confirmed whether the winning ball payout operation or the ball lending payout operation is in progress (step S7723). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not a prize ball payout operation specifying bit or a ball lending payout operation specifying bit is set in the payout control state flag. If the designated bit during the winning ball payout operation and the designated bit during the ball lending payout operation are both in the reset state, the payout control CPU 371 determines that the game ball has passed the payout number count switch 301 even though the payout operation is not in progress, and an error flag. Among these, the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is set (step S7724).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the payout number abnormality counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000) (step S7725). If it is equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (for example, 2000), the payout control CPU 371 determines that a payout number error has occurred and sets a payout number error error flag (step S7726).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 resets the prepaid card unit error flag for setting the error state of the prepaid card unit 50 (step S7727). Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the input state of the VL signal from the card unit 50 (step S7728), and if the VL signal is not input (if it is in the off state), the prepaid card unit error flag The prepaid card unit unconnected error designation bit is set (step S7729).

  In the display control process of step S760, the error display LED 374 performs notification by display (numerical display) according to the error flag and the error bit in the prepaid card unit error flag. Therefore, a communication error can be notified by the error display LED 374. Further, since the communication error is detected on the payout control means side, the communication error can be detected without increasing the burden on the game control means.

  In this embodiment, the main board non-connection error is automatically canceled when the connection signal is turned on (see steps S7701, S7717, and S7718). In addition, the error state may be eliminated.

  In this embodiment, a communication error is reported so as to be distinguishable from a communication error with the card unit 50 (a prepaid card unit unconnected error and a prepaid card unit communication error) and other errors. Therefore, a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is easily identified.

  In this embodiment, in error processing, first of the error flags, other than the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the payout case error designation bit, the main control communication error designation bit, and the withdrawal number abnormality error designation bit. After the bit is reset once (see step S7701), it is checked every time error processing is executed whether a full error, a ball break error, or a main control unconnected error has occurred. The payout switch abnormality detection error 2 designation bit, the payout case error designation bit, and the main control communication error designation bit are reset on the condition that the error release switch 375 has been operated. However, the payout number abnormality error is not canceled once it is set. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a payout number error occurs, the payout number error is canceled as a condition that the power supply is reset.

  82 and 83 are flowcharts showing the information output process of step S759. In the information output process, the payout control CPU 371 first loads a payout control state flag (step S7901), and checks whether or not a ball lending payout operation is in progress (step S7902). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the designated bit during the ball lending payout operation of the payout control state flag is set. If the ball lending / dispensing operation is in progress, the process proceeds to step S7909. If the ball lending payout operation is not in progress, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout number count switch 301 is in the on state (step S7903). If the payout number count switch 301 is in the ON state (in this case, the payout by the winning ball is detected), the payout control CPU 371 adds 1 to the value of the winning ball signal 1 output number counter (step S7904). At the same time, the value of the prize ball payout number counter is incremented by 1 (step S7905). The prize ball signal 1 output number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the condition for outputting the prize ball signal 1 is satisfied. The prize ball payout number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls paid out by the prize ball payout.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the added prize ball payout counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball information output determination value (10 in this example) (step S7906). If it is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball information output determination value (10 in this example), the payout control CPU 371 resets the prize ball payout number counter (step S7907) and sets the value of the prize ball information output number counter. 1 is added (step S7908). The prize ball information output count counter is a counter for counting the number of times that the condition for outputting prize ball information is satisfied.

  Next, if it is set, the payout control CPU 371 decrements the prize ball information output timer by 1 (step S7909), and checks whether the prize ball information output timer after the subtraction has timed out (step S7910). The prize ball information output timer is a timer for measuring the output duration time of prize ball information. If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S7914. If time-out has occurred, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball information output number counter is 0 (step S7911). If the value of the prize ball information output number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S7915. If the value of the winning ball information output number counter is not 0 (that is, if the number of winning ball information output conditions is still satisfied), the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning ball information output number counter. (Step S7912). Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a prize ball information output timer in order to start outputting the next prize ball information (step S7913). Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to output the prize ball information to the game control microcomputer 560 (step S7914). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process of setting output data in a prize ball information output bit (bit 7, see FIG. 61) of the output port 1.

  Next, if the payout control CPU 371 is set, the prize ball signal 1 output timer is decremented by 1 (step S7915), and it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball signal 1 output timer after the subtraction has timed out (step S7916). ). The prize ball signal 1 output timer is a timer for measuring the output duration time of the prize ball signal 1. If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S7920. If time-out has occurred, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball signal 1 output number counter is 0 (step S7917). If the value of the winning ball signal 1 output number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S7921. If the value of the prize ball signal 1 output number counter is not 0 (that is, if the number of established conditions for the prize ball signal 1 still remains), the payout control CPU 371 determines the value of the prize ball signal 1 output number counter. 1 is subtracted (step S7918). Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets a prize ball signal 1 output timer to start outputting the next prize ball signal 1 (step S7919). Then, the payout control CPU 371 performs control to output the prize ball signal 1 to the outside (step S7920). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for setting output data in a prize ball signal 1 output bit (bit 0; see FIG. 61) of the output port 0. In this embodiment, the winning ball signal 1 is not directly input to the terminal board 160 from the payout control board 31 and output to the outside, but is input to the terminal board 160 once through the main board 31. Is output externally.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 performs processing for setting output data in the gaming machine error state signal output bit (bit 1, see FIG. 61) of the output port 0 (step S7921), and loads an error flag (step S7922). ). If either the ball breakage error designation bit or the full tank error designation bit is set in the error flag (Y in steps S7923 and S7924), the gaming machine error status signal output bit of the output port 0 remains set. The process ends. In this case, the gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside based on the fact that the gaming machine error status signal output bit of the output port 0 is set in step S7921. In this embodiment, the gaming machine error state signal is not directly input from the payout control board 31 to the terminal board 160 but externally output, but is input to the terminal board 160 once via the main board 31. And output externally. On the other hand, if neither the ball breakage error designation bit nor the full tank error designation bit is set in the error flag, the payout control CPU 371 clears the gaming machine error state signal output bit of the output port 0 (step S7925), and processing Exit.

  By executing the above processing, in this embodiment, the prize ball signal 1 is output to the outside every time one prize ball payout is detected on the payout control means side. Further, prize ball information is output to the game control means side every time ten payout balls are detected on the payout control means side. Further, when a ball break error or a full tank error is detected on the payout control means side, a gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 20 and 21) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  86 to 90 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 sets a display result designation command reception flag (step S618A). Further, the production control CPU 101 stores the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618B).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S622). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag (step S624).

  In this embodiment, the big hit start 1 designation command reception flag, big hit start 2 designation command reception flag, and small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag set in steps S622 and S624 are designated as fanfare flags. Also called.

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S652). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S653).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S655). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d in accordance with the updated second reserved memory number (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S658). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S659).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S661). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d in accordance with the updated second reserved memory number (step S662).

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (step S663A). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. Further, the production control CPU 101 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S665). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are 0, and the variable display is not executed. Reset the number of pending storage to be stored. Even if the processing of step S665 is executed and the production control microcomputer 100 is in a state in which the addition or subtraction omission of the reserved memory number occurs and the erroneous reserved memory number is recognized, the reserved memory is stored. Can be reset to return to the normal state.

  If the received effect control command is the normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the common effect in-process flag indicating that the common effect is being executed is set. (Step S667). If the common effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to a common effect background screen (for example, a yellow display color background screen) (step S668). ). If the common effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color background screen) (step). S669). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a probability change state flag indicating that the game state is a probability change state and a time reduction state flag indicating that the game state is a time reduction state (step S670).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S671), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green display). Color background screen) (step S672). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S673).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S674), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the common effect flag is set (step S675). If the common effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to a common effect background screen (for example, a yellow display color background screen) (step S676). ). If the common effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a red display color background screen) corresponding to the probability change state (step). S677). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S678).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S667, S668, S675, and S676, the presence / absence of the common effect flag is determined based on the reception of the normal state background designation command and the probability variation state background designation command. However, the start timing of the common effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the common effect may be started by judging the flow of processing. Good. For example, when the big hit game is ended (specifically, when the big hit end effect process described later is ended) or when the small hit game is ended (specifically, a step of the effect symbol fluctuation stop process described later) The background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the same processing as steps S668 and S676 when the effect of the predetermined effect period is ended according to the process data for the small hit effect set in S869). A common effect may be started by performing a process of changing to (for example, a yellow display color background screen). With such a configuration, even when the next variation display cannot be started immediately after the big hit game or the small hit game is finished and no new holding memory is generated during the big hit game or the small hit game, the big hit game or the small hit game can be started. A common effect can be started immediately after the winning game is finished, and it can be made unrecognizable whether or not it is in a probable state.

  Also, in this embodiment, the case of sudden transition to a common effect triggered by a probable big hit or a small win has been shown. However, the game machine is not limited to such a game machine. It is a big hit that opens the big prize opening only, and is a big hit that is controlled to the short-time state after the big hit game is finished, that is, a big hit that appears as if it suddenly became short-time state.) In a gaming machine, when a sudden shortfall is hit suddenly, the execution period of the common effect may be shifted. In this case as well, the common effect may be started upon receipt of the background designation command, or when the jackpot game based on the sudden short / big hit is terminated (for example, when the jackpot end effect is terminated), as described above. In addition, a process for changing the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen for common effects (for example, a yellow display color background screen) according to the same process as steps S668 and S676 is started. You may make it do.

  In addition, for example, a so-called sudden normal big hit (a big hit with a very small number of times or a short period of time when the big prize opening is opened, and a big hit that is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game is finished. In a game machine that is configured to be controllable even if the game is configured to be in a normal state after ending the game, it may be shifted to the execution period of the common performance when suddenly a normal big hit is made. Good. In this case as well, the common effect may be started upon receipt of the background designation command, or when the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot suddenly ends (for example, when the jackpot end effect ends), as described above. In addition, a process for changing the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen for common effects (for example, a yellow display color background screen) according to the same process as steps S668 and S676 is started. You may make it do.

  If the received effect control command is a frame state display command (step S679), the effect control CPU 101 sets a prize ball error bit (bit 0; see FIG. 24) in the lower 4 bits of the frame state display command. It is confirmed whether it has been done (step S680). If set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display predetermined prize ball error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S681). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a character string such as “A prize ball error has occurred” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the full error bit (bit 1, see FIG. 24) of the lower 4 bits of the frame state display command is set (step S682). If set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display predetermined full error information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S683). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a character string such as “a full tank error has occurred” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the ball break error bit (bit 2; see FIG. 24) in the lower 4 bits of the frame state display command is set (step S684). If set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display predetermined ball-out error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S685). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a character string such as “A ball break error has occurred” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the payout number error error bit (bit 3; see FIG. 24) in the lower 4 bits of the frame state display command is set (step S686). If set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display predetermined payout number abnormality error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S687). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a character string such as “A payout number error has occurred” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101a checks whether or not the door opening abnormality error bit (bit 6: see FIG. 38) in the EXT data of the frame state display command is set (step S695). If set, the production control CPU 101a outputs a sound signal (sound number data) for outputting a predetermined special sound 1 for notifying that the open state of the glass door frame 2 is detected to the sound output board 70. (Step S696). In this case, the sound number data for special sound 1 input from the production control microcomputer 100 on the sound output board 70 is input to the sound synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. Then, the speech synthesis IC 703 generates a special sound 1 (for example, a warning sound such as a beep sound) according to the sound number data, and outputs it from the speaker 27 via the amplifier circuit 705. However, in this case, in step S630, which will be described later, a mode different from the special sound 2 that is output when an abnormal winning is detected in the opened state of the glass door frame 2 (for example, the sound output pattern, tone, and pitch of the sound are different). Different sound) is output.

  The output of the special sound 1 may be continuously output until, for example, the power supply to the gaming machine is turned off or until the glass door frame 2 is closed. You may make it output continuously until a period (for example, 10 seconds) passes. When continuously outputting until the glass door frame 2 is closed, the game control microcomputer 560 detects that the glass door frame 2 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A command indicating this is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball shortage error command (step S688), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display predetermined prize ball shortage error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S688). S689). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a character string such as “A shortage of prize balls has occurred” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball excess error command (step S690), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display predetermined prize ball excess error notification information on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S690). S691). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a character string such as “There was an excessive prize ball error” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  In addition, each error display may not be simply displayed in a superimposed manner, but may be prioritized and notified of an error having a high priority by ranking from the viewpoint of fraud importance. For example, a payout number abnormality error may be preferentially notified with the highest priority, or a newly generated error may be preferentially notified when the error state changes.

  If the received effect control command is a door opening prize abnormality command (step S692), the effect control CPU 101a outputs a predetermined special sound 2 for notifying that an abnormal prize is detected in the opened state of the glass door frame 2. A sound signal (sound number data) for generating the sound is output to the sound output board 70 (step S693). In this case, the sound number data for special sound 2 input from the production control microcomputer 100 on the sound output board 70 is input to the sound synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. Then, the speech synthesis IC 703 generates a special sound 2 (for example, a warning sound such as a beep sound) according to the sound number data and outputs it from the speaker 27 via the amplifier circuit 705. However, in this case, in step S696, the sound is different from the special sound 1 that is output when the open state of the glass door frame 2 is detected (for example, the sound output pattern, sound volume, and sound pitch are different). Sound is output.

  By executing the processing of step S693, in this embodiment, in the open state of the glass door frame 2, any winning opening (large winning opening, first starting winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14, normal) When an abnormal winning is detected based on the detection of a game ball winning at the winning openings 29, 30), a special sound is output from the speaker 27 to notify that an illegal act is being performed.

  The output of the special sound 2 may be continuously output until, for example, the power supply to the gaming machine is turned off or the glass door frame 2 is closed. You may make it output continuously until a period (for example, 20 seconds) passes. In the case of continuously outputting until a predetermined period elapses from the start of output, the production control CPU 101 starts a timer at the start of output of the special sound 2 and the predetermined period has elapsed by the timer. If confirmed, the sound number data for stopping the output of the special sound 2 is output to the sound output board 70. When continuously outputting until the glass door frame 2 is closed, the game control microcomputer 560 detects that the glass door frame 2 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A command indicating this is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. When the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100 receives a command to that effect, if the special sound 2 is output, the sound number data for stopping the output of the special sound 2 is output as sound. Output to the substrate 70. Further, in this embodiment, every time a winning is detected when the glass door frame 2 is in the open state, a prize abnormality command at the time of opening the door is transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 560 (see FIG. 56). Since the microcomputer 100 starts outputting the special sound 2 when receiving the door opening prize abnormality command (see steps S692 and S693), each time the door opening prize winning abnormality command is received, the special sound 2 is output from the beginning. The output will be started (that is, the output period is substantially extended if it is configured to stop when a predetermined period elapses from the start of output). Also good. For example, if a door opening abnormal command is newly received when the special sound 2 is being output, the door opening abnormal command may be ignored. Therefore, when it is configured to stop when, for example, 20 seconds elapse from the start of output, the output period is always 20 seconds. In the case of such control, after the output of the special sound 2 is finished, the special sound 2 is output from the beginning when a new door opening prize abnormality command is received. In addition, the reception of the ignored door opening prize abnormality command is stored, and when the special sound 2 is output, if there is a stored door opening prize abnormality command, the special sound 2 is output based on that command. The output may be started.

  In this embodiment, when the glass door frame 2 is opened, the special sound 1 starts to be output, and when the special sound 1 continues to be output, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives a prize when the door is opened. When the abnormal command is received, the output of the special sound 2 is started. In that case, the output of the special sound 1 may be stopped and the output of the special sound 2 may be started, or the special sound 2 may be output to be superimposed on the special sound 1. In the case of overlapping output, for example, when the sound number IC 703 (see FIG. 7) receives the sound number data of the special sound 2 during the output of the special sound 1, the special sound 1 and the special sound 2 are simultaneously output. Configured to output. In addition, when the special sound 2 is output on the special sound 1, it is preferable to use a sound having a higher volume than the special sound 1 as the special sound 2. In addition, when the output of the special sound 1 or the special sound 2 is started, there is a case where other sounds such as the output of the effect sound (for example, the output of the effect design variation or the sound output accompanying the big hit game) are output from the speaker 27. In that case, the output of the effect sound or the like may be stopped and the output of the special sound 2 may be started, or the special sound 2 may be output to be superimposed on the effect sound or the like. It may be. In the case where the effect sound effect is superimposed and output, a sound having a higher volume than the sound effect effect sound is used as the special sound 2.

  Further, as the special sound 2, for example, a sound having the same output pattern as that of the special sound 1 but having a high volume is used, or a sound having the same output pattern as that of the special sound 1 but having a higher sound is used. May be. The special sound 2 may be a beep sound (continuous sound) or an intermittent sound. As an example, the special sound 1 is a beep sound and the special sound 2 is an intermittent sound. Further, when the special sound 1 is also an intermittent sound, the intermittent interval may be shorter than that of the special sound 1. Furthermore, a voice (for example, a continuous call of “IJO”) may be used as the special sound 2 so that a game clerk or the like can recognize the special sound 2 more easily.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where it alert | reports that the fraudulent act is performed by outputting a special sound was shown, the way of alerting | reporting is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment, For example, The display screen of the effect display device 9 may display that the fraudulent act is being performed, and the fraudulent act is performed by lighting or blinking the lamps 25 and 28 in a predetermined lighting / flashing pattern. You may notify that it is. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to output a fraud detection signal indicating that an illegal act is being performed to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined error display is performed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 to perform error notification regarding errors not related to door opening (see steps S681, S683, S685, S687, S689, S691). ) The method of notifying errors relating to errors not related to door opening is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, an error may be notified by outputting a predetermined warning sound using the speaker 27, or an error may be notified by lighting or blinking the decoration LED 25 or the frame LED 28 in a predetermined lighting / flashing pattern. Further, any two or all of the display on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the sound output using the speaker 27, and the lighting / flashing display using the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28 are used in combination for error notification. May be performed.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S699). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): When the big hit is reached, after the variation time is over, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. In the case of a small hit, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the small hit after the end of the variation time. For example, when a fanfare designation command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. For example, when an ending designation command for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S861). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S867. In this embodiment, as described later, when a big hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S866. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S868. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S861 is a stage where the fanfare effect is not yet executed although the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, so the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S862 is not executed. The process proceeds to step S867 without repeatedly executing the process of displaying the.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disconnected symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) (step S862). The production control CPU 101 may perform control to stop and display the production symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, when neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in step S862 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed: N in step S863), the presentation control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S864). . For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a command reception flag such as a display result designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S865).

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed in step S862 (Y in step S863), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S866), and the fanfare flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag) is set (step S867). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S867), the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S868) and selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S869). Then, the process timer is started (step S870).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the sudden sudden change big hit A or the small hit is (step S871). Note that whether or not it is suddenly probable big hit A or small hit can be specifically determined by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is suddenly probable big hit A or small hit, CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the probable change state flag is set (step S872). If the probability variation state flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the time reduction state flag is set (step S873). If the time reduction flag is not set (that is, if the low probability / low base state is set), the effect control CPU 101 sets the common effect flag (step S874). Then, control goes to a step S876.

  If neither sudden probability change big hit A nor small hit (ie, normal big hit, probability change big hit or sudden probability change big hit B), the production control CPU 101 is common if set. The effect flag is reset (step S875). Then, control goes to a step S876.

  In this embodiment, the common effect flag is set at the timing before the opening control of the big prize opening is started at the end of the variation display that has become the normal big hit, the probability big hit, or the sudden probability big hit B by the processing of step S875. However, the control method shown in this embodiment is not limited to the above. For example, after finishing the fluctuation display that became a normal jackpot, a probable big hit, or suddenly a promising big hit B, the common effect flag is reset and the common effect is executed at the timing when the big prize opening control by the big hit game is finished You may make it complete | finish a period.

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps S871 to S875, in this embodiment, when the probability sudden hit big hit A or the small hit is suddenly in the low probability / low base state, The execution period is shifted to the execution period, and the execution period of the common performance is continued until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, it is not limited to sudden probability change big hit A or small hit, but for example, so-called sudden short and big hit (a big hit with a very small number of times and a short time opening of the big prize opening, it is controlled to the short state after the big hit game ends. In other words, in a game machine that is configured to be controllable even if it suddenly appears as if the time is suddenly shortened. You may do it. In this way, when it is configured to be able to control suddenly at the time of jackpot, in the jackpot game, it is controlled whether the winning prize opening is controlled with the same opening pattern as in the case of suddenly odd-changing jackpot, so that it is suddenly odd or big Anything that does not recognize whether it is a big hit is acceptable.

  In addition, when it is configured to be able to control sudden short and big hits too, after the big hit game based on sudden probable big hits, all shift to the short time state (high base state) to recognize whether or not it is a probable change state. It may not be possible. In this case, after suddenly suddenly changing big hit, the fluctuation display of 100 times may be ended and the short time state (high base state) may be ended, or the short time state (high base state) may be continued until the next big hit. (In this case, the time-short state (high base state) may be continued until the same number of fluctuation displays are ended in the case of sudden probability change big hit and sudden short-time big hit). In the case where the time-short state (high base state) is continued until the next big hit, it is only necessary to notify that the state is in a probable variation state after 100 fluctuation displays. In addition, for example, by deciding whether or not to be surely notified by performing a lottery process using a random number before the end of the 100-time variation display, it is notified that the state of probability change is determined when it is determined to notify the probability change. You may do it.

  In addition, for example, a so-called sudden normal big hit (a big hit with a very small number of times or a short period of time when the big prize opening is opened, and a big hit that is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game is finished. In a game machine that is configured to be controllable even if the game is configured to be in a normal state after ending the game, it may be shifted to the execution period of the common performance when suddenly a normal big hit is made. Good. In this case, for example, when the normal sudden big hit becomes the normal state (low probability / low base state), the execution period of the common effect is shifted, and the sudden base change sudden hit does not become the high base state. (I.e., when controlled to a high probability / low base state), or when a small hit occurs in the normal state (low probability / low base state) What is necessary is just to make it transfer to the execution period of a common production. Even when it is configured so that it can be controlled in a normal big hit like this, in the big hit game, the opening control of the big prize opening is performed with the same opening pattern as in the case of the sudden positive change big hit, Anything that can not recognize whether it is a sudden or normal big hit.

  In this embodiment, the execution period of the common effect is continued until the next big hit occurs. For example, after the transition to the execution period of the common effect, a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) The execution period of the common effect may be continued until the change display of) is ended. In addition, the execution period of the common effect may be continued until the display of fluctuations of 20 times or 100 times is finished, not limited to 50 times. In addition, for example, by performing a lottery process using random numbers for each variable display, it is determined whether or not to end the execution period of the common effect, and when it is determined to end the execution period of the common effect The common effect flag may be reset to end the execution period of the common effect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S876). However, if it is a small hit, it is not a big hit, so the effect during the big hit from the big hit display process (step S804) to the big hit end effect process (step S807) is not executed, but set in step S869. It is preferable that an effect corresponding to the small hit game is executed over a predetermined effect period in accordance with the process data, and the process returns to the variation pattern command reception waiting process in step S800.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the door opening sensor 155 that detects the open state of the glass door frame 2 and each winning opening (large winning opening, second start winning opening 14, normal winning opening 29, 30). ), Each winning switch (count switch 23, second start port switch 14a, winning port switches 29a, 30a) for detecting a game ball is provided. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 detected that a game ball was detected at the winning opening by one of the winning switches when the door opening sensor 155 detected that the glass door frame 2 was in the open state. Based on this, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to output a special sound for notifying the abnormal winning based on the fact that the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines that the abnormal winning has occurred. Therefore, when the glass door frame 2 is in the open state, a special sound can be output based on the fact that a game ball is detected at any one of the winning openings, so that an abnormal winning can be notified. Unauthorized acts can be prevented by reliably detecting and informing of unauthorized acts performed when 2 is open.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2-280786, since it is only possible to generate an alarm sound simply by detecting that the glass door is opened, fraudulent acts are not necessarily performed. It is not always possible to detect and notify that there is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, not only the open state of the glass door frame 2 is detected, but it is determined that the winning is detected based on the fact that the winning is further detected in the open state of the glass door frame 2, and notification is made. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect and notify an illegal act performed when the glass door frame 2 is in the open state.

  In this embodiment, as a method of detecting an abnormal winning when the glass door frame 2 is in the open state, each winning switch 23, 14a, 29a, 30a is turned on in the switch process (see step S21). Although the case where it is performed by confirming whether or not the door opening signal is input when the event is detected (see FIG. 49), the abnormal winning detection when the glass door frame 2 is in the opened state is shown. The method is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the glass door frame 2 is in the open state at the timing when winning at each winning opening (large winning opening, second start winning opening 14, normal winning opening 29, 30) is determined in the winning ball process (see step S32). You may make it determine whether it is an abnormal prize when it is.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing another example of the prize ball command output counter addition process. In the example shown in FIG. 93, when the value of the prize ball command output counter pointed to by the pointer is incremented by 1 in step S5111, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the door opening signal from the door opening sensor 155 is on ( Step S5115A). If the door open signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 transmits a door open prize abnormality command indicating that an abnormal prize has been detected in the opened state of the glass door frame 2 to the effect control microcomputer 100. (Step S5111B).

  Even in the configuration as shown in FIG. 93, when the processing of steps S5111A and S5111B is executed, any one of the winning mouths (large winning mouth, second start winning prize) in a state where the glass door frame 2 is in the open state. It is possible to detect the winning of the game ball at the mouth 14, the normal winning opening 29, 30), determine that an abnormal winning has occurred, and send a door opening abnormal winning command to the effect control microcomputer 100. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (when the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the big winning opening, or the normal winning openings 29, 30 are won). 2), a payout condition establishment signal (winning signal) indicating that a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (in this example, 10 balls) has been established is output to the outside. Further, based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition, a predetermined calculation (in this example, addition of the number of prize balls) is performed using a prize ball number according to the established predetermined payout condition, and a cumulative value ( (Value of the winning counter) is updated (see step S5118), and a payout condition establishment signal is externally output based on the updated cumulative value reaching a predetermined number. Then, in accordance with the external output of the payout condition establishment signal, a predetermined number is used to perform a calculation in the direction opposite to the predetermined calculation (in this example, 10 subtraction) to update the accumulated value (see step S5121). Therefore, the game situation (for example, the expected number of winning balls) when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied can be accurately grasped outside without increasing the control burden.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit game state is ended, at least a predetermined period (in this example, 30 seconds after the final round of the big hit game is finished. 20 seconds after the ending effect is finished). By the time, the payout control based on the specific payout condition (winning at the big winning opening) established during the big hit gaming state is finished. Then, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the next big hit gaming state can be controlled even before the payout control is ended based on the fact that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed before the predetermined period elapses. Thus, even in a gaming machine configured such that the next jackpot can be generated before the payout control for the previous jackpot game is completed, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Since a payout condition satisfaction signal (winning signal) indicating that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied is output to the outside, the number of payouts in the big hit gaming state can be accurately grasped.

  For example, in order to be able to recognize the number of prize balls on the external device side such as a hall computer, only a signal (for example, prize ball information shown in this embodiment) indicating that game balls are actually paid out is used. It is also conceivable to configure to output externally. However, as described above, if the gaming machine is configured such that the next jackpot can be generated before the payout control for the previous jackpot game is finished, the current jackpot information is simply output to the outside. There is a case where it is impossible to know whether the winning ball is a winning ball during a game or a winning ball during a previous jackpot game, and the award is given to an external device such as a hall computer. A situation will occur in which the number of balls cannot be accurately recognized. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (a stage where a winning occurs), the winning signal is output to the outside, and when the signal is output to the outside, the next big hit has already occurred. Such a situation can be prevented, and a situation in which the number of prize balls cannot be accurately recognized by an external device such as a hall computer is prevented.

  For example, if a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-296570 is used, a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is satisfied based on the fact that the predetermined payout condition is satisfied. It is possible to output a signal indicating that this has occurred. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-296570, the first prize ball information is externally output based on the fact that a predetermined number (10) of payout conditions are satisfied in a normal state. When a ball payout error occurs, the second prize ball information is externally output based on the fact that a predetermined number (10 pieces) of payout conditions have been established. Is output externally. Further, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-296570, the second prize ball information is only output externally when the prize ball dispensing operation is stopped when a prize ball dispensing error occurs, and the previous big hit If the next jackpot occurs before the payout control for the game is completed, the information regarding the number of prize balls may not be output to the outside. In contrast, in this embodiment, assuming that the gaming machine is configured such that the next jackpot can be generated before the payout control for the previous jackpot game is completed, a stage where a predetermined payout condition is established. By outputting a winning signal externally (when a winning occurs), the number of winning balls can be accurately recognized by an external device such as a hall computer.

  In addition, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-296570 does not assume a case where there are a plurality of types of payout conditions with different award balls as the predetermined payout conditions. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls according to the predetermined payout condition established is accumulated, and a winning signal is output to the outside based on the accumulated value reaching the prescribed number. Even when there are multiple types of payout conditions, such as three, ten, fifteen, etc., the predetermined payout conditions for paying out a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls are established. It is possible to prevent the determination process for determining whether or not the game has been performed from being complicated, and to prevent an increase in the control burden for externally outputting the payout condition establishment signal (winning signal).

  In this embodiment, more precisely, in the prize ball command output counter addition process executed immediately before the winning signal is output in the information output process in step S31, the accumulated value (value of the prize counter) is decremented by 10. The cumulative value is updated before the winning signal is output. However, the method of updating the cumulative value is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, as long as it is updated with an external output of a winning signal, the cumulative value may be updated after outputting the winning signal.

  In this embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the value of the winning counter as a predetermined calculation in response to the establishment of a predetermined payout condition (see step S5118), and the reverse direction is accompanied by the external output of the payout condition establishment signal. In this calculation, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 10 (see step S5121), but the method of updating the winning counter is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of winning balls is subtracted from the value of the winning counter as a predetermined calculation in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined payout condition, and 10 is added to the value of the winning counter as a reverse calculation in accordance with the external output of the payout condition establishment signal. You may comprise as follows.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the accumulated value and externally outputs the winning signal. However, the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the winning ball number command. The cumulative value may be updated on the basis and the winning signal may be output to the outside. In this case, for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 updates the cumulative value of the planned number of prize balls based on the number of prize balls indicated by the received prize ball number command, and every time the cumulative value becomes 10 or more, A winning signal may be output externally. In this configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 560 newly establishes a payout condition even before the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command transmitted last time is completed (either The next prize ball number command is transmitted at the timing when the winning prize is received), and the payout control board 37 is backed up by a backup power source, so that even if a power failure occurs, the payout is made for a predetermined time. It is desirable to be able to hold cumulative values and the like that are updated on the control microcomputer 370 side. If configured in such a way, a winning signal can be output to the outside at the timing when any winning opening is generated, and even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is disadvantageous to the player Can be prevented. Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 may output the winning signal directly to the outside via the terminal board 160 or may output it to the outside via the game control board (main board) 31 once. .

  Further, when the payout control microcomputer 370 side is configured to output the winning signal externally, for example, the processing for outputting the winning signal and the processing for outputting the winning ball information are configured as a common routine. You may do it. In this case, for example, in the information output processing (see step S759) executed on the payout control microcomputer 370 side by the same configuration as the winning timer set processing (see FIG. 58) shown in this embodiment, the winning signal is displayed. What is necessary is just to make the process for outputting and the process for outputting prize ball information into a common routine.

  Further, in this embodiment, the gaming control microcomputer 560 indicates that the initialization process has been executed when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, and that a predetermined error (in this example, an abnormality to the second start winning port 14). A security signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine based on the establishment of a predetermined signal output condition including that it has been determined that (winning) has occurred. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 has a common output terminal (a terminal board of the terminal board) provided in the gaming machine when the initialization process is executed and when it is determined that a predetermined error has occurred. A security signal is output from the common connector CN8). Therefore, by outputting a security signal based on the execution of the initialization process, the possibility that an illegal act aiming for a big hit by performing the initialization process (such as clearing the RAM) illegally is performed. Can be recognized by a hall computer, etc., and an illegal act performed when a gaming machine is powered on can be prevented. In addition, since the security signal is output to the common output terminal when the initialization process is executed and when it is determined that a predetermined error has occurred, the waste of the signal line for external output is reduced. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the waste of the signal line for external output while preventing an illegal act performed when the power to the gaming machine is turned on.

  In this embodiment, when a security signal is output, a predetermined signal output condition is newly established (in this example, an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is newly detected). In this case, the output time for outputting the security signal is extended. Therefore, when a predetermined signal output condition is newly established, instead of outputting a new security signal, the control signal load is reduced by extending the output time of the security signal being output. can do.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the detection signal input from the second start port switch 14a (proximity switch) and the detection signal input from the winning confirmation switch 14b (photo sensor). It is determined that the difference between the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 14a and the number of game balls detected by the winning confirmation switch 14b exceeds a predetermined threshold (in this example, 10 or more). Then, it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred as a predetermined error. In this embodiment, the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b are constituted by sensors of different detection methods (in this example, a proximity switch and a photo sensor). For this reason, it is possible to more reliably detect fraudulent acts on the switch that detects the game ball, and to take certain measures against fraud.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the special symbol variation display and the prize ball payout process based only on the input of the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a. . Further, the detection signal input from the winning confirmation switch 14b is used only for determining whether or not an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. Therefore, since the special symbol variation display and the prize ball payout process are performed based on the detection result of one of the switches, it is possible to prevent an increase in the processing burden accompanying the strengthening of countermeasures against fraud.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the difference between the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 14a and the number of game balls detected by the winning confirmation switch 14b is a predetermined value. As a threshold value, a difference (for example, three) between the number of detected game balls in the second start port switch 14a and the number of detected game balls in the winning confirmation switch 14b when the inside of the second start winning port 14 becomes clogged. It may be configured to determine whether or not a value greater than (for example, 10) is exceeded. According to such a configuration, when the inside of the second start winning opening 14 becomes clogged, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. it can. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent erroneous determinations associated with strengthening countermeasures against fraud.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 has a predetermined error (in this example, an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14) when the initialization process is executed when the power to the gaming machine is turned on. ) To output a security signal over different times. Specifically, in this embodiment, when an initialization process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, a security signal is output to the outside for 30 seconds, and an abnormal winning is given to the second start winning opening 14. If a security signal is detected, a security signal is externally output for 4 minutes. Therefore, by determining the output time of the security signal, it is possible to determine whether the initialization process has been performed or a predetermined error has occurred in an external device such as a hall computer. It becomes.

  In this embodiment, when the power failure is recovered, the high probability state signal (high probability flag) is stored in the backup RAM, and the high probability state signal (high probability signal) is transmitted to the terminal board. Externally output via 160. In this case, the output of the high-accuracy signal is continued until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the power failure is restored (in this example, until the first big hit occurs), and the output of the high-accuracy signal is prohibited when the predetermined condition is satisfied. To do. Therefore, it is possible to check the presence / absence of a high-accuracy signal output on the hall side, and it is possible to save the trouble of checking whether or not the gaming machines have been initialized one by one. . Therefore, in a gaming machine configured not to notify that it is in a high-probability state, it is possible to reduce the work load when the gaming machine is initialized.

  Further, in this embodiment, a winning area passing signal (starting port signal) is externally output based on starting winning winning in the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14. In this embodiment, the payout condition is satisfied by using a signal output routine (a winning timer setting process in steps S1020 and S1023 during the information output process) common to a signal output routine used for externally outputting the winning area passing signal. A signal (winning signal) is output externally. Therefore, the winning area passing signal and the payout condition establishment signal can be externally output using a common signal output routine, and the program capacity for externally outputting the signal can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 generates a payout number signal (prize ball number command) that can specify the number of prize balls based on a predetermined payout condition being established. In 370, a process for updating the accumulated value is executed in the process for outputting the payout number signal (the prize ball command output counter addition process (see step S501) during the prize ball process (see step S32)). Therefore, the process for outputting the payout number signal and the process for updating the accumulated value can be made common, and the control burden can be reduced. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the prize ball command output counter addition process, the prize ball command output counter used for outputting the prize ball number command is updated and the prize counter used for outputting the prize signal. This update process can be executed using a single pointer, and the processing load on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the winning signal, the payout means indicating that a specific number (10 in this example) of game balls has actually been paid out by the payout means (ball payout device 97). A signal (prize ball information) is output externally. Therefore, the difference between the expected number of winning balls based on the establishment of the predetermined payout conditions and the number of game balls actually paid out can be grasped externally, and whether or not there is an abnormality in the payout situation can also be externally determined. It can be possible to do.

  In this embodiment, the case where the predetermined number used for determining the output of the winning signal and the specific number used for determining the output of the winning ball information are both 10 has been described. The predetermined number or specific number used for output determination is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a winning signal is output based on the fact that a predetermined payout condition for paying out 15 game balls as a predetermined number is satisfied, and based on the fact that 15 specific game balls are paid out. And prize ball information may be output. Also, for example, the predetermined number and the specific number do not need to be the same number, and a winning signal is output based on a predetermined payout condition for paying out 15 game balls as the predetermined number, Various modes are conceivable, such as outputting prize ball information based on the payout of 20 game balls as a specific number.

  In this embodiment, when the payout condition establishment signal (winning signal) is output externally, a specific period after the output of the payout condition establishment signal is started using the signal output period measurement timer (winning information storage timer). It is determined whether (in this example, 100 ms) has elapsed, and the output of the payout condition establishment signal is continued until it is determined that the specific period has elapsed. The value of the signal output period measurement timer is stored in the power-backed RAM 55, and when the power supply is started, the value of the signal output period measurement timer stored in the backup RAM is cleared (see step S9104). For this reason, it is possible to prevent one output of the payout condition establishment signal from being erroneously recognized externally as two outputs due to the interruption of power supply during the output of the payout condition establishment signal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when power supply is started, a high probability state signal (high probability signal) is based on the fact that high probability state information (probability change flag) is stored in the backup RAM. Is set to signal output permission information (high-accuracy medium output permission flag) permitting external output (see step S9103 of the hot start process shown in FIG. 12), and based on the signal output permission information being set. The signal is output externally during the high probability state. Further, in the process for setting the signal output permission information by the signal output permission information setting means (hot start process shown in FIG. 12), the value of the signal output period measurement timer stored in the backup RAM is cleared (shown in FIG. 12). (See step S9104 of the hot start process). Therefore, the process for setting the signal output permission information and the process for clearing the value of the signal output period measurement timer can be shared, and the control burden can be reduced.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the RAM 55 in which the value of the winning information storage timer is stored is backed up, so that if a power failure occurs while outputting the winning signal, the winning signal is output due to the power failure. Is temporarily interrupted, the output of the winning signal is resumed based on the value of the winning information storage timer that is backed up after the power is restored. Therefore, even though the output of the winning signal is only interrupted and resumed in the middle, when viewed from the external device side such as a hall computer, it is erroneously recognized as if the winning signal was output twice. Will happen. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure occurs during the output of the winning signal, the value of the winning information storage timer is forcibly cleared when power is restored so that the output of the winning signal is not resumed. This prevents the output of one signal from being mistakenly recognized externally as the output of two times.

  In this embodiment, an external output signal including a payout condition establishment signal (winning signal) (symbol confirmation number 1 signal, start port signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, time reduction signal, security signal) A game control board on which an external output board (terminal board 160) for outputting signals, high-accuracy signals, prize ball information) to an external device (for example, a hall computer) and a game control microcomputer 560 are mounted. (Main substrate) 31. The external output board receives an external output signal from the game control board 31 and outputs the input external output signal to the external device. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the routing of the external output signal wiring to the external output board.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to control to a short time state in which the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened. Further, the time-short state can be controlled to either the first time-short state or the second time-short state in which the variation time is further shortened compared to the first time-short state. Therefore, even if a short time state is provided to enhance the interest in the game, the number of payouts in the big hit game state can be accurately grasped. In other words, the provision of a time reduction state makes it more likely that a next jackpot will occur before the payout control for the previous jackpot game is completed. Even in this case, the number of payouts during the big hit gaming state can be accurately grasped.

  Further, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second short time state, even if it is determined to be a big hit, a short time is determined as the variation time (for example, even in the case of a big hit, FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the ultrashort PB1-2 shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to further shorten the period until the next big hit gaming state occurs after the big hit gaming state is ended, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, control is performed to the second short time state at a different rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15D and 15E, the first short time is always displayed when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed. The allocation for suddenly probable big hits B controlled by the state is different. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15D and 15E, only when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, suddenly controlled to the second short-time state on the condition that the state is a high probability / high base state. There is an allocation to the probability variation jackpot A, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, there is no sudden allocation to the probability variation jackpot A. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the ratio of shifting to the second short time state between the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it controls to a 2nd time-short state at a different ratio according to a game state. For example, in this embodiment, even if a sudden probability change big hit A occurs, it is controlled to the second short time state only when it is in a high probability / high base state, and in the other game state, it is changed to the second short time state. Does not control. Therefore, the interest with respect to a game can be improved by changing the ratio which transfers to a 2nd short time state according to a game state.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a prize ball number command on condition that a confirmation command (connection OK command) is received from the payout control microcomputer 370. However, the RAM included in the payout control microcomputer 370 may be backed up so that the award ball number command can be transmitted without waiting for a confirmation command from the payout control microcomputer 370. . Also in the gaming machine configured as described above, according to the same configuration as this embodiment, it is confirmed that a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls is satisfied. If the payout condition establishment signal (winning signal) is output to the outside, similarly, the game situation (for example, the expected number of winning balls) when the predetermined payout condition is established without increasing the control burden. It can be accurately understood externally.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 transmit and receive control commands by serial communication. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a connection confirmation command for confirming the communication connection state with the payout control microcomputer 370 every time a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses. To 370. The payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a connection OK command to the game control microcomputer 560 based on the reception of the connection confirmation command. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 370 is connected in such a manner that the game control microcomputer 560 can recognize the control state (in this example, a prize ball error, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, and a payout number error error). The command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. With such a configuration, by using a serial communication method, it is possible to facilitate wiring between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370. In addition, the control state signal (response signal to which the control state is added) is transmitted by placing the control state on the connection OK command that the payout control microcomputer 370 periodically outputs based on the reception of the connection confirmation command. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control state signal from being missed without considering the output timing of the control state signal, and the communication between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is reliably performed. be able to. In this embodiment, the cycle (interval) for transmitting the connection confirmation command is 1 second, but it may be 0.5 seconds or the like.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 completes the payout control, the game control microcomputer 560 resets a predetermined period (1 second in this example) to the prize ball process timer and uses the prize ball process timer. Measurement control is started (see step S52505). If the number of prize balls is not stored (specifically, if no prize ball command output counter has a count value of 1 or more in step S52301), the game control microcomputer 560 resets the game. A new connection confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 based on the time-out of the prize ball process timer. For this reason, an interval period can be provided between the end of execution of payout control and the transmission of a new connection confirmation command, and processing at the end of execution of payout control is concentrated, and a new connection check command is overwritten. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a winning ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 370 based on the detection of a winning regardless of the transmission timing of the connection confirmation command. Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball number reception command based on the reception of the prize ball number command, and receives a prize ball preparation command during execution of the payout control. The signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560 every signal output period (1 second in this example). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball in such a manner that the game control microcomputer 560 can recognize the control state (in this example, a prize ball error, a full tank error, an out of ball error, and a payout number error error). The preparing command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the reception of the prize ball number reception command. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden of the game control microcomputer 560 by not performing connection control command transmission control unnecessarily during execution of payout control. Even when the payout control is being executed, the control state signal can be output by adding the control state to the award ball preparation command, so that the game control microcomputer 560 can recognize the control state. it can.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 receives the prize ball end command and stores the number of prize balls (specifically, in the prize ball command output counter in step S52301). If the count value is 1 or more), a new award ball number command is immediately transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 regardless of the transmission of the connection confirmation command. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the execution process of the payout control.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 60 determines a predetermined error (in this example, a prize ball error, a full tank error, an out of ball error, and an error based on the control state indicated by the received connection OK command. It is determined whether a payout number error) has occurred. Then, the game control microcomputer 60 transmits a prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 370 on the condition that it is determined that a predetermined error has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of sending a prize ball number command when the payout control cannot be normally performed due to an error state. In particular, in this embodiment, since the RAM provided in the payout control microcomputer 370 is not backed up by the backup power supply, if a prize ball number command is transmitted when there is an abnormality in the payout control, the power is reset. For example, the memorized number of prize balls may be lost, which may cause a great disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, when there is an abnormality in the payout control, the prize ball number command is transmitted while the memory of the prize ball number is retained on the game control microcomputer 560 side backed up by the backup power source. It is possible to prevent such a disadvantage from occurring by controlling to hold.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 does not receive the connection OK command after transmitting the connection confirmation command, the game control microcomputer 560 increases the time interval for transmitting the connection confirmation command to a specific period. Every time (in this example, 10 seconds) elapses, the control is switched to control for transmitting a connection confirmation command. Therefore, in a state where the communication state between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is unstable, the connection confirmation command transmission process is performed by extending the interval period until the connection confirmation command is transmitted. Can be performed less frequently, and a wasteful processing load can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 is used for game control when a predetermined error (in this example, a prize ball error, a full tank error, a ball run out error, and a payout number error) occurs. Information by which the microcomputer 560 can recognize a predetermined error is set by changing a specific bit of the connection OK command, and the connection OK command with the setting is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits a frame state display command in which information capable of recognizing a predetermined error set in the received connection OK command is set as it is to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, based on the reception of the frame state display command, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (the production display device 9 in this example) to notify that a predetermined error has occurred. Do. Therefore, it is possible to notify that a predetermined error has occurred using the effect device, and to reduce the processing load on the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, in this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 determines the payout excess exceeding the number of unpaid game balls to be paid out and the number of unpaid game balls to be paid out. The insufficient payout number that is not satisfied is counted cumulatively using a payout number abnormality counter. When the value of the payout number abnormality counter becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined payout number error error determination value (2000 in this example), the payout control is stopped and the payout stop state is controlled. Therefore, instead of judging each payout control, the payout control is executed by comprehensively judging the payout control executed under an abnormal condition based on the value of the payout number abnormality counter counted up cumulatively. Can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately prevent the act of illegally paying out the game ball.

  Further, in this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 counts up the value of the payout number abnormality counter when the payout shortage number equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (2 in this example) occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the execution of the payout control is stopped more than necessary. In other words, since there are not a few small numbers (1 in this example) of insufficient payouts in the operating state of the gaming machine, the number of insufficient payouts exceeding the predetermined reference number (2 in this example) has occurred. By counting up on the condition, it is possible to prevent the execution of the payout control from being stopped more than necessary.

  In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes re-payout control for driving and controlling the ball payout device 97 to pay out only one game ball when a payout shortage occurs. If the payout of the game ball is not detected even after the re-payout control is executed, the value of the payout number abnormality counter is counted up. Therefore, even if the number of payout shortages is small, it is possible to appropriately stop the execution of payout control by reflecting it in the count value of the payout number abnormality counter, and to take illegal measures to prevent the act of illegally paying out game balls. Can be strengthened.

  In this embodiment, when the payout number abnormality error is detected and the payout stop state is controlled, the payout stop state is canceled on condition that the power supply of the gaming machine is reset. Therefore, in order to release the payout stop state, the game store clerk must perform the release operation after confirming the abnormal state. Therefore, the payout stop state is canceled illegally and the game is continued in the abnormal state. This can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 55 provided in the gaming control microcomputer 560 can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period by the backup power supply even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to be in the payout stop state, the game control microcomputer 560 prohibits the transmission of the winning ball number command even if a winning occurs. For this reason, the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 55 (specifically, the value of the prize ball command output counter) is cleared even though the payout is stopped due to an abnormality caused by the gaming machine side that is not caused by fraud. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 adds the prize ball number to the prize ball number counter at the timing of sending the prize ball number command, and receives the prize ball information based on the received prize ball information. Subtract 10 from the counter value. Then, based on the fact that the value of the prize ball number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined prize ball shortage determination value (501 in this example), it is determined that there is a prize ball shortage error. Based on the fact that it is less than the determination value (0 in this example), it is determined that there is an excessive prize ball error. Therefore, the abnormal state can be detected by both the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370. Accordingly, it is possible to further strengthen the fraud countermeasure that prevents the act of illegally paying out the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a connection signal indicating a connection state of communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output port 57. Since the communication connection state can be confirmed at any timing on the payout control microcomputer 370 side, the prize ball is paid out when the communication connection state is abnormal. It can be surely prevented.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 normally transmits a connection confirmation command 1 second after the connection OK command is received, and when a communication error occurs (for example, connection OK). When the command cannot be received), the connection confirmation command is transmitted 10 seconds after the connection confirmation command is transmitted, and the period of 1 second or 10 seconds is measured by a timer (a counter configured by software). The connection confirmation command may be transmitted by an internal interrupt that occurs when the counter updated as hardware by the internal clock reaches a predetermined value (1 second or 10 seconds). In that case, the counter may be cleared by reception of the connection OK command, or the counter may be cleared if an internal interrupt is generated with a predetermined value.

  Next, a modified example of the physical configuration of the terminal board 160 mounted on the gaming machine will be described. 94 and 95 are explanatory diagrams showing modifications of the physical configuration of the terminal board 160. FIG. In the gaming machine, for example, a cover member 800 for covering and protecting each board such as the main board 31, the effect control board 80, and the payout control board 37 is provided, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95. As described above, the terminal board 160 may be embedded in the cover member 800. Also, a terminal board cover 801 for covering and protecting the terminal board 160 is attached to a portion of the cover member 800 where the terminal board 160 is attached. Here, FIG. 94 shows a state where the terminal board cover 801 is attached to the cover member 800, and FIG. 95 shows a state where the terminal board cover 801 is removed from the cover member 800. As shown in FIG. 95, two terminal claws 801a are provided on the upper portion of the terminal board cover 801, and the terminal board is secured by inserting the claws 801a and fastening them with screws 801b. A cover 801 can be attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, a plurality of terminals 96a, 96b, 98a, 98b,... Are provided on the terminal board 160 for connecting cables with external devices such as hall computers. A terminal board 900 is provided. Further, the terminal board 900 has a two-stage configuration including a terminal row including terminals 96a, 96b,... And a terminal row including terminals 98a, 98b,. One set (set of signal line and ground line). For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, there is one set of the terminals 96a and 96b arranged in the horizontal direction among the terminals in the upper row of terminals, and the horizontal direction of the terminals in the lower row of terminals. One set of the terminal 98a and the terminal 98b arranged in a row. Further, the terminals 96a, 96b, 98a, 98b,... Provided on the terminal board 900 are respectively provided with knobs 95a, 95b, 99a, 99b, and the knobs 95a, 95b,. The terminals 96a, 96b, 98a, 98b... Are opened by performing operations such as pressing 99a, 99b. For example, when the upper knob 95a is pressed, the cable can be connected to the terminal 96a, and when the lower knob 99a is pressed, the cable can be connected to the terminal 98a. For example, when the upper knob 95b is pressed, the cable can be connected to the terminal 96b, and when the lower knob 99b is pressed, the cable can be connected to the terminal 98b.

  94 and 95, the knobs 95a, 95b, 99a, 99b,... Provided for each of the terminals 96a, 96b, 98a, 98b,. Has been. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as accidentally operating the knob for the adjacent terminal, and improve workability when performing the work of connecting the cable to the terminal board 900. be able to.

  FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional structure of a portion of the cover member 800 to which the terminal board 160 is attached. As shown in FIG. 96, the terminal board 160 is sufficiently placed so that the terminal board 900 provided on the terminal board 160 is located inside the surface of the cover member 800 (the X plane shown in FIG. 96). The cover member 800 is attached to the back side. As described above, the terminal board 900 provided on the terminal board 160 is configured to be inside the surface of the cover member 800 (the X surface shown in FIG. 96). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as contact with the terminal board 900.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 96, the terminal board cover 801 is inclined so that the side wall portion 801c gradually narrows. Since the side wall 801c is inclined as described above, even when the terminal board cover 801 is attached, it is easy for a finger or the like to enter, and when connecting the cable to the terminal board 900, Workability can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the pachinko machine is applied as the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described. However, the parrot machine can also be applied as the gaming machine according to the present invention. In this case, by applying the configuration shown in the above embodiment, the number of game balls taken in or returned from the parrot machine is cumulatively counted up to a counter, and the counter value is a predetermined abnormality determination value (for example, 2000) or more, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the number of game balls taken in or returned, and the take-in operation or return operation may be controlled to be stopped. It is also possible to apply a slot machine as a gaming machine according to the present invention. In this case, by applying the configuration shown in the above embodiment, the number of medals paid out from the hopper tank in the slot machine is cumulatively counted up to a counter, and the counter value is a predetermined abnormality determination value (for example, 2000). ) If this is the case, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the number of medals paid out, and the medal payout operation from the hopper tank may be controlled to be stopped.

  For example, when applied to a slot machine or parrot machine, when a medal or game ball return operation is performed, an excessive return number or an unpaid number of returns may be counted up cumulatively. Further, for example, when applied to a hopper tank of a slot machine, the excessive number of medals and the number of unpaid medals may be counted up cumulatively. Furthermore, for example, when applied to a parrot machine, the number of excessive game balls taken or the number of insufficient game balls taken in is counted up for the purpose of detecting abnormal operation of the gaming machine, not as fraud. You may make it do.

  An embodiment of the slot machine will be described below with reference to the drawings (FIGS. 97 and 98). As shown in FIG. 97, the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment (modified example) includes a housing (not shown) having an open front surface, a front door pivotally supported at a side end of the housing, It is composed of

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment, reels 602L, 602C, and 602R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 97, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 603 provided on the front door.

  For example, “red 7 (white 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell” can be distinguished from each other on the outer periphery of the reels 602L, 602C, 602R. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn 21 in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the perspective window 603, respectively.

  The reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 632L, 632C, and 632R (see FIG. 98), so that the symbols of the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are continuously provided in the see-through window 603. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R, three continuous symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 603 as display results.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion unit 604 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout outlet 609 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 605 that is operated when setting the bet number of the bet, and using a credit, a specified number of bet numbers determined according to the game state within the range (in this embodiment, in the normal game state, “ 3 ”, MAXBET switch 606 operated when setting“ 1 ”for the regular bonus), medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled (for setting the credit and bet number) A payout switch 610 operated when the medal used is returned), a start switch 607 operated when starting the game, Le 602L, 602C, stop switch 608L is operated to stop each rotation of the 602R, 608C, 608R are provided.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 611 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 612 and a payout indicator 613 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BETLED 614 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BETLED 615 that notifies that the bet number is set is 2 and lit that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 616 to be notified by, lighting request LED 617 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, start valid LED 618 to notify that the game start operation by operating the start switch 607 is effective, weight (previous game) (Waiting to start reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 619 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED during replay 620 to notify that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 606, a BET switch valid LED 621 (see FIG. 98) for notifying by lighting that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 605 and the MAXBET switch 606 is effective is provided. In the stop switches 608L, 608C, 608R, the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 622L, 622C, 622R that notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 608L, 608C, 608R is valid are turned on. (See FIG. 98).

  A liquid crystal display 651 capable of displaying an effect image or the like related to a game is provided at the upper center position inside the front door, and a display image displayed on the display screen through a liquid crystal display window 670 disposed in front of the liquid crystal display 651. Can be visually recognized. Further, on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display 651, two movable actors 675L and 675R for performing effects related to the game are respectively arranged, and are arranged in front of the left and right movable actors 675L and 675R. As described above, the internal movable accessory 675L and 675R can be seen through from the production perspective windows 671L and 671R made of a transparent panel provided on the front door.

  Further, between the left and right movable accessories 675L and 675R and the production perspective windows 671L and 671R, there is a concealment state in which the left and right movable combinations 675L and 675R are hidden from the production perspective windows 671L and 671R so as not to be seen through. , Endless shutter sheets constituting two shutter devices (not shown) that can be changed to a non-hidden state in which the left and right movable accessories 675L and 675R can be seen through the production perspective windows 671L and 671R are arranged. It is installed.

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 623 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state and a stop state excluding a RAM abnormality error by a predetermined key operation, changing a set value or checking a set value Set value display 624 for displaying the set value at that time, and the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 604, the hopper tank (not shown) side provided inside the housing or the medal payout outlet 609 side A flow path switching solenoid 630 for selectively switching to any one of the above, a insertion medal sensor 631 for detecting a medal that has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 604 and flowed down to the hopper tank side is provided.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) including reel sensors 633 capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the reels 602L, 602C, 602R, reel motors 632L, 632C, 632R, and reels 602L, 602C, 602R, respectively. , A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 604, a hopper motor 634 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout outlet 609, and the hopper motor 634 being paid out. A payout sensor 635 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front face of the power supply box, a stop switch 636 for selecting enable / disable of a stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of the big bonus (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed), An automatic checkout switch 629 for selecting whether the automatic checkout function is valid / invalid for controlling automatic checkout processing (processing for adjusting (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of the big bonus, Setting key switch 637 for switching to the setting change mode at startup, functioning as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in normal times, and winning probability of internal lottery in the setting change mode A reset / setting switch 638 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of (delay rate) Power switch 639 is operated to ON / OFF the power is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 601 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 604, or credits are used to set the number of bets. In order to use the credit, the single BET switch 605 or the MAX BET switch 606 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the game state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 97) become valid and the operation of the start switch 607 is valid, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as the specified number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state, and one is determined in the regular bonus. If medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  When the start switch (also referred to as a lever) 607 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 608L, 608C, and 608R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 602L, 602C, and 602R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 603.

  Then, when all the reels 602L, 602C and 602R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout exit 609 (see FIG. 97). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 602L, 602C, 602R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 601. As shown in FIG. 98, the slot machine 601 includes a game control board 640 (corresponding to the game control board (main board) 31 in FIG. 6), an effect control board 690 (corresponding to the effect control board 80 in FIG. 6), a power supply The board 600 is provided, the gaming state is controlled by the game control board 640, the presentation according to the gaming state is controlled by the presentation control board 690, and the power supply board 600 is used to drive electric power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 601. Generated and supplied to each unit.

  The game control board 640 is connected to the one-sheet BET switch 605, the MAXBET switch 606, the start switch 607, the stop switches 608L, 608C, and 608R, the checkout switch 610, the reset switch 623, the insertion medal sensor 631, and the reel sensor 633. In addition, the above-mentioned payout sensor 635, stop switch 636, automatic settlement switch 629, setting key switch 637, reset / setting switch 638 are connected via the power supply board 600, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  The game control board 640 includes the credit display 611, the game auxiliary display 612, the payout display 613, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 614 to 616, the insertion request LED 617, the start valid LED 618, the waiting LED 619, the replaying LED 620, and the BET. A switch valid LED 621, left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 622L, 622C, and 622R, a set value display 624, a flow path switching solenoid 630, and reel motors 632L, 632C, and 632R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 600. The hopper motor 634 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on the control of a later-described main control unit 641 (corresponding to the game control microcomputer 560 in FIG. 6) mounted on the game control board 640. Like That.

  The game control board 640 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 641a, ROM 641b, RAM 641c, and I / O port 641d. A main control unit 641 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) Random number generation circuit 642 for generating, sampling circuit 643 for obtaining random numbers from the random number generation circuit, detection signals input from switches such as sensors and switches connected directly to game control board 640 or via power supply board 600 Switch detection circuit 644, a motor drive circuit 645 that controls the drive of the reel motors 632L, 632C, and 632R, a solenoid drive circuit 646 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 630, various displays connected to the game control board 640, LED drive circuit for LED drive control 47. The power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 601 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 648 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 641, A reset circuit 649 for providing a reset signal to the CPU 641a when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 641a, and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 641a transmits various commands to the effect control board 690 via the I / O port 641d. A command transmitted from the game control board 640 to the effect control board 690 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 690 to the game control board 640. A transmission line for commands transmitted from the game control board 640 to the effect control board 690 includes a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 680. The game control board 640 and the effect control board 690 are not directly connected.

  On the effect control board 690, a liquid crystal display 651 (see FIG. 97) disposed on the front door of the slot machine 601, an effect LED 652, speakers 653 and 654, a reel LED 655, a shutter motor 810, a shutter sensor 811, and a movable object Electrical components such as the LED 881, the movable object motor 805, and the movable object sensor 829 are connected, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 691 mounted on the effect control board 690. It is like that.

  The effect control board 690 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 691a, a ROM 691b, a RAM 691c, and an I / O port 691d in the same manner as the main control part 641, and includes a sub-control part 691 for effect control and an effect control board 690. A liquid crystal drive circuit 692 that controls the drive of the connected liquid crystal display 651, an effect effect LED 652, a reel LED 655, an LED drive circuit 693 that controls the drive of the movable object LED 881, and a sound that controls audio output from the speakers 653 and 654. Output circuit 694, detection signal input from switches such as a reset circuit 695 that provides a reset signal to the CPU 691a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 691a, a shutter sensor 811, a movable object sensor 829, and switches Detect the switch The CPU 691a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 640, and is mounted with a motor driving circuit 697 for controlling the driving of the H detection circuit 696, the shutter motor 810, and the movable object motor 805. In addition to performing various controls for performing effects, each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 690 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Next, the internal lottery process executed by the main control unit 641 will be described. At the timing when the start switch 607 is turned on, the sampling circuit 643 acquires (extracts) a numerical value (random number) counted by the random number generation circuit 642. The sampling circuit 643 outputs the numerical value acquired as a random number to the CPU 641a in the main control unit 641.

  The CPU 641a in the main control unit 641 uses the numerical value acquired from the sampling circuit 643 and the determination value set for each combination (small combination, replay combination, special combination, etc.) in the internal lottery table stored in the ROM 641b. By comparing, it is determined whether or not a small role / replaying role / special role is won. Further, as a table for internal lottery, a plurality of tables are provided so that the medal payout rate changes according to the set value / game state (normal game state, regular bonus). For example, in the internal lottery table, a plurality of judgment values are set for each of a small combination (cherry, bell), a re-playing combination (replay), a special combination (regular bonus, big bonus), and a loss. Further, for example, when “1” to “6” are provided as setting values that can be set by the reset / setting switch 638, the determination value is assigned so that the medal payout rate changes as the setting value number increases. Table is used. In addition, when the gaming state is a normal gaming state, a table in which a judgment value is assigned to each of the roles and outliers so that any of the small roles, replaying roles, and special roles can be won is used. In the case of a regular bonus, a table in which judgment values are assigned to the small role and the offside so that only the small role can be won (a table in which no judgment value is assigned to the replaying role / special role) is used. . The setting of the determination value in the above table is an example, and the determination value is not limited to such setting. In this embodiment, the number of bets can be set by the player only “3” in the normal gaming state and “1” in the regular bonus, but either of the normal gaming state or the regular bonus can be set. Even in the gaming state, any one of “1” to “3” can be set by the player as the bet number. A plurality of internal lottery tables having different winning probabilities for replaying and special roles may be prepared, and internal lottery may be performed using tables corresponding to the number of bets.

  As described above, in the slot machine 601 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery is determined according to the set value.

  In the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set is determined according to the gaming state as described above, and the prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, there are a regular bonus and a normal gaming state as the gaming state. Among these, 1 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, and the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the normal gaming state is 3 is defined. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the game is started when the betting number is set to 3. Can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 601 of this embodiment, when all the reels 602L, 602C, and 602R are stopped, the winning line that is activated (in the case of this embodiment, all the winning lines are always activated. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the game state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and the winning flag of the combination must be set in the RAM 641c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combination permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes. As described above, in the slot machine 601 according to the present invention, when it is determined by the prize predetermining means that the generation of the specific prize is permitted and the specific prize display result is not derived to the prize variable display section, There is a carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the generation of a prize from the next game. In such a configuration, even when the specific winning display result is not derived to the winning variable display section, the decision to allow the occurrence of the specific winning is carried over from the next game onward, A loss to the player can be prevented.

  As a combination in the slot machine 601, a big bonus and a regular bonus are defined as a special combination, cherry and bell are defined as a small combination, and replay is defined as a re-playing combination. In addition, as a combination of combinations in the slot machine 601, big bonus + cherry and regular bonus + cherry are determined. That is, the total of the combination of the combination and combination is 7.

  In the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a regular bonus. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it depends on whether any special role is being carried over (whether any special role has already been set in the winning flag of the special role). The combination of combinations and combinations that are subject to lottery are also different. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “1” is set as the state number, and “2” is set as the state number in the case of a regular bonus.

  When the gaming state is a normal gaming state and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, a big bonus, a regular bonus, a big bonus + cherry, a regular bonus + Cherry, replay, cherry, bell, that is, all combinations and combinations of combinations are subject to internal lottery. In addition, when the game state is the normal game state and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, a combination of replay, cherry, bell combination and combination Is subject to internal lottery. Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, the combination of cherry and bell and combinations of combinations are targeted for internal lottery.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on one of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and two medals are paid out in the normal gaming state. 15 medals are paid out. If the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5. Since you won the cherry on the winning line, 4 medals will be paid out in the normal gaming state, but in the regular bonus, even if you win the cherry on the 2 winning lines, one game Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out at 15 is set to 15, only 15 medals are paid out. A bell is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and in the normal gaming state, 8 medals are paid out. 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When a replay is won, the medals will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets no longer required to be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed and will always be 3) This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 641c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus exceeds 465. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the gaming state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 641c.

  The regular bonus and the big bonus described above may be collectively referred to simply as “bonus”.

  97, only the white symbol 7 is drawn on the reels 601L, 601C, and 601R in FIG. 97. The design is drawn.

  In the slot machine 601 of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a small role, a re-playing role or a special role (bonus) is won in the internal lottery (a small role, a re-playing role or a special role is won by winning the internal lottery). Suggestive effects suggesting that there is a possibility that the winning flag is set in the RAM 641c) on the stage members (liquid display 651, movable right and left movable parts 675L, 675R, etc. of the liquid crystal display 651). To be executed. In particular, based on the fact that it is determined that the special combination is allowed to be generated by the internal lottery process (a state in which the internal lottery is won and the special combination winning flag is set in the RAM 641c), the CPU 691a displays the liquid crystal display. The suggestion effect is executed so that a specific display result (for example, “7, 7 and 7” are aligned) is obtained as a combination of the left, middle, and right symbols Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen of the device 651. .

  Note that the gaming state advantageous to the player is not limited to the above big bonus and regular bonus, but for example, a notification target winning that occurs on condition that reel deriving conditions (for example, stop order or stop timing) are satisfied. When the stop switch 606L, 606C, 606R is operated by limiting the game state (so-called assist time (AT)) in which an operation procedure that satisfies the derivation condition is notified or at least one of the reels is retracted. Control the displayed symbols to be easy to stop, and the challenge time (CT) that allows the player to derive a combination of winning symbols by pushing forward, specific winnings (for example, replay winnings and singles) Gaming state (so-called replay time (RT) Middle state), and further, a game state (for example, ART that combines assist time and replay time) may be mounted, and the suggestion producing means establishes a transition condition for shifting to these game states. The suggestion effect may be performed so that a specific display result is obtained based on what is being performed.

  Further, the type of specific display result may be different depending on the type of gaming state where the transition condition is satisfied. (For example, “7 ・ 7 ・ 7” or “3 ・ 3 ・ 3” is based on the fact that the big bonus was won as a special role in the internal lottery, and the regular bonus was won as a special role in the internal lottery. “3.3.3” is prepared, and “1.1.1” is prepared based on the fact that the transition condition for shifting to the replay time (RT) is satisfied.)

  In the example of the gaming machine shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the control microcomputer is realized by the main control unit 641 mounted on the game control board 640. The payout means is realized by a hopper driven by a hopper motor 634. Further, the game control medium payout control means is realized by executing processing for controlling the hopper motor 634 by the main control unit 641. The cumulative update means is realized by the main control unit 641 executing a process of cumulatively adding a payout excess or payout deficiency to a counter. Also, the payout stopping means is realized by being controlled by the main control unit 641 so as not to operate the hopper motor 634. As shown in the example of the gaming machine shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in a slot machine or the like, a game control process for controlling the progress of the game is executed by the main control unit 641 mounted on the game control board 640. At the same time, the hopper motor 634 is controlled to perform payout control. Therefore, in the example of the gaming machine shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the game control microcomputer is realized by the main control unit 641, and the payout control microcomputer is also realized by the main control unit 641.

  In the slot machine shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when various errors are detected, a security signal may be output to the outside via a terminal board or the like. In this case, for example, when a RAM initialization process or setting change is performed at the time of starting the slot machine, a security signal is output to the outside, and when a hopper error is detected (the number of payouts from the hopper tank is A security signal may also be output externally even when an abnormality in the number of medals paid out is detected based on a predetermined abnormality determination value (for example, 2000) or more. Also, for example, in addition to or instead of these cases, for example, when there is no medals in the hopper tank and the payout cannot be performed (medals run out), or when medals are clogged, the inserted medals are distributed. Even when various errors are detected such as when an error of a selector to be detected is detected, the security signal may be output to the outside.

  In the embodiment described above, gaming machines as shown in the following (1) to (5) are also shown.

(1) A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game, and fluctuation data storage means for storing fluctuation data (for example, a value of a special symbol process flag and a reserved memory number counter) generated when performing control. For example, RAM 55), storage content holding means (for example, a capacitor as a backup power source) capable of holding the storage contents of the variable data storage means for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and operation An initialization operation means (for example, a clear switch) that outputs an operation signal in response to the storage of the fluctuation data storage means when an operation signal is input from the initialization operation means when power supply is started Initialization process execution means for executing an initialization process for initializing the contents (for example, executing steps S10 to S14 in the game control microcomputer 560) Part), error determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred (for example, a part for executing steps S121 to S126 in the game control microcomputer 560), and at least initialization processing execution means A predetermined signal output condition is satisfied, including that the initialization process has been executed and that the error determination means has determined that a predetermined error has occurred (for example, the initialization process has been executed, 2 based on the detection of an abnormal winning at the start winning port 14), an external output means for outputting a predetermined external output signal (for example, a security signal) to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, in the gaming control microcomputer 560). In steps S14a and S128 (see FIGS. 11 and 48), the security signal information timer is set. Thereafter, the processing of steps S1069 to S1103 (see FIG. 57) is executed to output a security signal), and the external output means is when the initialization processing is executed by the initialization processing execution means. When it is determined by the error determination means that a predetermined error has occurred, a predetermined external output signal is output from a common output terminal (for example, the connector CN7 provided on the terminal board 160) provided in the gaming machine. (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs the same as a common security signal from the connector CN7 of the terminal board 160 by executing the processes of steps S14a, S127, and S1069 to S1103), and a predetermined external output When a predetermined signal output condition is newly established when a signal is output , Extending the output time for outputting a predetermined external output signal (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S121 to S126 to execute the second start regardless of whether or not the security signal is being output) A gaming machine characterized in that when an abnormal winning is detected in the winning opening 14, step S127 is executed to overwrite the value of the security signal information timer. With such a configuration, by outputting a predetermined external output signal based on the execution of the initialization process, it is possible to prevent an illegal act performed when the gaming machine is turned on. In addition, since a predetermined external output signal is output to the common output terminal when the initialization process is executed and when it is determined that a predetermined error has occurred, the signal line for external output is wasted. Can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the waste of the signal line for external output while preventing an illegal act performed when the power to the gaming machine is turned on.

(2) The gaming machine includes a first detection unit (for example, a start port switch) that detects a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a passing region (for example, the second start winning port 14) provided in the game region. (Coil L in (proximity switch) 14a) and first game medium detection means (for example, start port switch (proximity switch) 14a) that outputs a first detection signal when a game medium is detected by the first detector. And a signal output unit (game medium detection means for outputting a detection signal: equivalent to power source, coil L, resistor R and capacitor C) and a game medium passing downstream through the first detection unit. A second detection unit (for example, an input unit of the phototransistor 342 in the winning confirmation switch (photosensor) 14b) and a second detection signal when the second detection unit detects a game medium Second game medium detection means for outputting (for example, the output part of the phototransistor 342 in the winning confirmation switch (photosensor) 14b), and the error determination means is a first detection input from the first game medium detection means. Based on the signal and the second detection signal input from the second game medium detection means, the difference between the number of game media detected by the first detection unit and the number of game media detected by the second detection unit is If it is determined that a predetermined threshold value (for example, 10) has been exceeded, it is determined that an abnormal passage of the game medium to the passing area has occurred as a predetermined error (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S127). Determination (see FIG. 48), it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred), the first detection unit and the second detection unit are composed of sensors of different detection methods For example, the second start hole switch 14a is configured as a proximity switch, the winning confirmation switch 14b may be configured) as a photo sensor. According to such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably detect fraudulent acts on the detection unit that detects the game medium, and to take reliable measures against fraud.

(3) The gaming machine only receives the first detection signal from the first game medium detection means (for example, the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a is input). After the detection signal is input, each can be identified based on the fact that a start condition that allows the start of variable display is satisfied (for example, the variable display of special symbols is not executed and the game state is not a big hit gaming state) Variable display executing means for executing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols) (for example, a part for executing steps S300 to S303 in the game control microcomputer 560) and first game medium detecting means. Based on the input of the detection signal 1 (for example, the input of the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a), the prize game medium is paid as a prize. Payout control execution means (for example, a part for executing the process of step S32 in the game control microcomputer 560 (see FIG. 13)), and a second detection signal input from the second game medium detection means Is used only to determine whether or not an abnormality in passing the game medium to the passing area has occurred by the error determining means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the detection signal from the winning confirmation switch 14b in step S125). It is also possible to configure so that only confirmation is made in the processing (see FIG. 48), and it is used in step S127 for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14). According to such a configuration, the variable display of identification information and the payout of premium game media are processed based on the detection result in one of the detection units, thereby preventing an increase in processing burden associated with strengthening countermeasures against fraud. can do.

(4) The error determination means uses the difference between the number of game media detected by the first detection unit and the number of game media detected by the second detection unit as a predetermined threshold, The number of game media detected in the first detection unit when a plurality of game media are accumulated between the first detection unit and the second detection unit (for example, when the second start winning opening 14 is in a ball clogged state). It is determined whether or not a value greater than the difference between the number of detected game media and the number of game media detected by the second detection unit (for example, three, see FIG. 52) has been exceeded (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 has detected a value). In this process, it is determined whether or not it is 10 or more with a sufficient margin for the three detection errors of the second start port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b shown in FIG. Good. According to such a configuration, when a plurality of game media stays in the passage area (when a ball is clogged), it is erroneously determined that a game media passage abnormality (winning abnormality) has occurred. Can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent erroneous determinations associated with strengthening countermeasures against fraud.

(5) The external output means outputs predetermined external outputs over different time periods when the initialization process is executed by the initialization process execution means and when the error determination means determines that a predetermined error has occurred. (For example, when the initialization process is executed, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the security signal information timer to 30 seconds in the process of step S14a and executes the processes of steps S1069 to S1103. In the case where an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected, the security signal information timer is set to 4 minutes in step S128 and steps S1069 to S1103 are executed). According to such a configuration, by determining the output time of a predetermined external output signal, whether the initialization process is performed or a predetermined error occurs in the external device. It becomes possible to discriminate.

  In the above embodiment, game machines as shown in the following (A) to (F) are also shown.

(A) A player can play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, the first start winning opening 13, the second start winning prize) A gaming machine that pays out game media based on the mouth 14, the big prize opening, and the normal winning openings 29 and 30, and a prize area provided in the game area (for example, the first start prize opening 13, Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the 2 start winning opening 14), a winning area passing signal external output for externally outputting a winning area passing signal (for example, a starting opening signal) indicating that the gaming medium has passed through the winning area. Means (for example, a part for executing steps S1002 to S1020, S1102, and S1103 (see FIGS. 54 and 57) in the game control microcomputer 560) and a predetermined payout condition are satisfied. A payout condition establishment signal external output means (for example, a payout condition establishment signal) that externally outputs a payout condition establishment signal (e.g., a winning signal) indicating that a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) of game media has been established , A part for executing steps S1021 to S1023, S1102, and S1103 (see FIGS. 55 and 57) in the game control microcomputer 560, and the payout condition establishment signal external output means is the winning area pass signal external output means Uses a signal output routine (for example, a winning timer setting process) common to a signal output routine used to externally output a winning area passing signal, and outputs a payout condition establishment signal to the outside (for example, a game control microcomputer 560). Is a common winning timer set shown in FIG. 58 in step S1020 and step S1023. Call the physical outputs a starting opening signal and winning signal) game machine.
According to such a configuration, the timing at which the payout condition is satisfied is accurately managed by externally outputting a payout condition satisfaction signal indicating that the predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number of game media is satisfied. can do. Further, the winning area passing signal and the payout condition establishment signal can be externally output using a common signal output routine, and the program capacity for externally outputting the signal can be reduced.

(B) In the above (A), the predetermined payout conditions include a plurality of types of payout conditions with different numbers of game media payouts (for example, starting at the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14). Three payout conditions are established when winning, 15 payout conditions are established when winning a big prize opening, and 10 payout conditions are awarded when winning normal winning openings 29 and 30. Based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition, a cumulative update means (for example, a game) that performs a predetermined calculation using the number of payouts according to the established predetermined payout condition and updates the cumulative value The control microcomputer 560 includes a part for executing the process of step S5118 (see FIG. 28), and the payout condition satisfaction signal external output means is configured such that the cumulative value updated by the cumulative update means has reached a predetermined number. Based The payout condition establishment signal is output to the outside (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S5122 based on the determination of Y in step S5120, adds the winning information storage counter, and wins in step S2007). When it is determined that N is based on the value of the information storage counter, the process after step S2008 (see FIG. 58) is executed to start outputting the winning signal), and the cumulative updating means outputs the payout condition establishment signal to the external output. Accordingly, a game that is configured to perform a calculation in the opposite direction to the predetermined calculation using the predetermined number and update the accumulated value (for example, a part that executes step S5121 in the game control microcomputer 560). Machine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately grasp the gaming situation when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, without increasing the control burden.

(C) In the above (B), game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) including cumulative update means and controlling the progress of the game, and payout means (for example, ball payout) for paying out game media Device 97) and payout control means (for example, payout control microcomputer 370) for controlling the payout means, and the game control means is a game medium to be paid out based on a predetermined payout condition being satisfied. The payout number signal output means (for example, the process of step S52305 in the game control microcomputer 560 (see FIG. 33)) that outputs a payout number signal (for example, a prize ball number command) that can specify the number of games to the payout control means is executed. The cumulative update means updates the cumulative value in the process for the payout number signal output means to output the payout number signal. (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to update the winning counter in the winning ball command output counter addition processing (step S501: see FIG. 26) during the winning ball processing in step S32). A gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, the process for outputting the payout number signal and the process for updating the accumulated value can be made common, and the control burden can be reduced.

(D) A payout in which the payout control means pays out the payout means by driving the payout means in the number (C) specified in the payout number signal output by the payout number signal output means in (C) above. Game medium payout control means for executing control (for example, a portion for executing the processing of step S755 (see FIG. 64) in the payout control microcomputer 370), and a specific number (eg, 10) of game media by the payout means A payout signal external output means for outputting a payout signal (for example, prize ball information) indicating that the payout has been paid out (for example, as shown in FIG. A gaming machine comprising an output system (connector CN-3 → R10 → PC10 → connector CN10) provided to output ball information.
According to such a configuration, the difference between the expected number of payouts based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition and the number of game media actually paid out can be grasped externally, and an abnormal payout condition can be obtained. The presence / absence of the presence or absence can also be determined externally.

(E) In any one of the above (A) to (D), a payout condition establishment signal is obtained using a signal output period measurement timer (for example, a winning information storage timer) for measuring the output period of the payout condition establishment signal. Signal output period determination means for determining whether or not a specific period has elapsed since the start of the output (for example, the part for executing the process of step S2015 (see FIG. 58) in the game control microcomputer 560), and power Even if the supply is stopped, the stored contents can be retained for a predetermined period, and at least a backup storage means for storing the value of the signal output period measurement timer (for example, a power-backed up RAM 55 for storing a prize information storage timer) The payout condition satisfaction signal external output means comprises a signal output period determination means and a specific period (for example, 100 ms) has elapsed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processing of steps S2016 to S2018 while determining N in step S2015, and outputs a winning signal. When the power supply is started, the clearing means for clearing the value of the signal output period measurement timer stored in the backup storage means (for example, the processing in step S9104 in the game control microcomputer 560 (FIG. 12)). A gaming machine further comprising:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent one output of the payout condition establishment signal from being erroneously recognized as two outputs due to the interruption of power supply during the output of the payout condition establishment signal. can do.

(F) In any one of the above (A) to (E), an external output signal including a payout condition establishment signal (for example, a winning signal) (for example, a symbol determination number of times 1 signal, a start port signal, a jackpot 1 signal, 1 external output board (for example, terminal board 160) for outputting 2 jackpot signals, 3 jackpot signals, time-short signal, security signal, high accuracy signal, prize ball information) to an external device (eg, hall computer) And a game control board (for example, a game control board (main board) 31) on which game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted, and the external output board is An external output signal is input from the game control board, and the input external output signal is output to an external device (for example, the terminal board 160 receives the number of pattern determinations input from the main board 31). Gaming machine configured to output signals, starting signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, time-short signal, winning signal, security signal, high accuracy signal, prize ball information) .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the wiring of the external output signal wiring to the external output board.

  Note that the gaming machines (A) to (F) described above are gaming machines that can solve the following problems.

  That is, as a conventional gaming machine, in order to be able to manage the number of game media paid out externally, the game media was paid out based on the fact that the game media paid out was detected by a sensor. In some cases, a signal indicating the above is output externally (see, for example, JP-A-2002-239168). For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a prize ball information signal is sent to the terminal board every time the number of prize balls paid out becomes 10, based on the detection of a gaming medium by a prize ball count switch (sensor). The output is through.

  For example, in a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-239168, a signal indicating that a game medium has been paid out is externally output based on the fact that the paid out game medium is detected by a sensor. Thus, the game situation such as the number of payout of game media can be accurately grasped outside (for example, at the hall side). However, in general, gaming machines are often configured to allow the generation of the next specific gaming state before the end of payout based on the establishment of the payout condition that occurred during the specific gaming state. Therefore, even if it is configured to externally output a signal indicating that the game medium has been paid out, if the next specific gaming state occurs before the payout is completed, the timing at which the payout condition is satisfied is set. It becomes impossible to manage, and the number of payouts during a specific game state cannot be accurately grasped outside.

  The gaming machines (A) to (F) described above are gaming machines that can solve such problems, and can accurately manage the timing at which the payout condition is satisfied.

  The present invention can be suitably applied to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 13a 1st starting opening switch 14a 2nd starting opening switch 14b Winning confirmation switch 15 Variable winning ball apparatus 31 Game control board (main board)
37 Dispensing control board 56 CPU
80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
160 Terminal Board 370 Discharge Control Microcomputer 371 Discharge Control CPU
380 Serial communication circuit (withdrawal control side)
505 Serial communication circuit (game control side)
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a door that can be changed between a closed state that covers a game area and an open state that allows the game area to be contacted from the outside, and is capable of performing a predetermined game using a game medium. ,
Door state detecting means for detecting the state of the door body;
Game medium detecting means for detecting a game medium passing through a specific area provided in the game area;
Abnormal passage that determines that an abnormal passage has occurred based on the detection of the game medium by the game medium detection means when the door state is detected by the door state detection means. A determination means;
A gaming machine comprising: an abnormal passage notification means for outputting a predetermined notification sound for notifying abnormal passage based on the abnormal passage determination means determining that an abnormal passage has occurred.

Images